Home

En User`s Manual

1. Use a single point Average several points Red 4 en P AF Blue 4 c e b White balance can also be adjusted by moving the red and blue sliders or by entering a value from 0 1 to 10 in the text boxes to their right Reset Click this button to reset the red and blue curves to the default value for gain 1 0 Red slider Blue slider Adjust gain by moving these sliders or entering a value from 0 1 to 10 in the text boxes to their right Copying White Balance to the Camera D2H Only If the image in the active window was taken with the D2H the new white balance value can be copied directly to one of the camera s white balance presets or recorded to the camera memory card Before copying a value to the camera make sure the camera is connected and turned on Before copying a value to the memory card remove the card from the camera and insert it in a CF card reader or card slot Select Write settings to camera from the white balance settings menu The dialog shown at right will be dis played Enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters and click OK Write White Balance Settings to Cam fx You can write the current White Balance settings to the D2H and use them as a Preset White Balance Enter a description of this White Balance 1 J Choosing a Value for Gain Very large and small values for gain can result in a drop in image quality Copying White Balance to the Camera D2H
2. Next Image Selected button Auto Image Rotation D2H Only Tall portrait orientation photographs taken with On the default setting selected for Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu will be displayed in portrait orientation Photographs taken with the D2H in the horizontal shooting position or with Off selected for Auto image rotation will be dis played in wide landscape orientation Attribute Icons The attribute icons in the status bar are identical to those displayed in Nikon Browser See Nikon Browser Thumbnail Attributes A 52 When a Single Thumbnail Is Selected In Windows even if you open only one thumbnail in the thumbnail list area you can browse through all the still images stored in the same folder as the selected image 124 Viewing the Entire Image To fit the image to the Nikon Viewer window click the Fit Image to Window button or select Fit Image to Window from View menu To enlarge the Nikon Viewer window to fill the desktop and display the image full frame click the Fit Image to Desktop button or select Fit Image to Desktop from View menu Fit Image to Desktop Fit Image to Window Zooming Images in and Out Use the tools described below to zoom the image the image displayed in the view area in or out The current zoom ratio is displayed in the title bar W Nikon Viewer DSC_0001 NEF Zoom ratio The Zoom In Zoom Out Buttons Click the Zoom In button to zoom in
3. 150 By default the Bird s Eye palette is in Tool Palette 1 The portion of the image visible in the active image window is indicated by a red outline Tool Palette 1 gt Curves gt El color Balance W W unsharp Mask I Ea digital DEE gt Size Resolution iv Bird s Eye Red outline displayed eo mo Oe D gt Information E When the mouse pointer is moved over the red outline it changes to a a cursor Drag the red outline over the area of the image you would like to view The selected area will be displayed in the active image window Nikon Capture Editor DSC_0001 NEF 50 gt Shooting Data Ry Tool Palette 1 gt El curves gt El Color Balance gt El unsharp Mask F Ea Digital DEE gt Size Resolution I sird stye gt Information Changing the Size of the Bird s Eye Palette The size of the Bird s Eye palette can be adjusted by dragging the borders of the tool palette Windows or by dragging the handle at its lower right corner Macintosh 144 Rotating and Flipping Images The image in the active image window can be rotated or flipped as described below Rotating Images Click the J button or select 90 degrees CW from the Rotate sub menu to rotate the im age in the active window 90 degrees to the right Click the j button or select 90 degrees CCW from the Rotate sub menu to rotate the image in the active window 90 degrees to the left To rotate the image
4. Page Setup Print Ctrl P Exit Alt F4 75 6 Click the CD R or CD RW drive icon once to select it and choose Write to CD in the File menu or click the CD R raids drive icon with the right mouse button and select Write to l Edit using other programs gt CD in the menu that appears The CD Writing Wizard will be displayed Display file list For CD writing Eject Proparties Rename a File or a Folder F2 Move Copy Page Setup Exit Alt F4 After making sure that a CD R or CD RW disk is inserted in the drive enter a volume name for the new CD and click Next to begin copying Tiles CD Writing Wizard Welcome to the CD Writing Wizard This wizard helps you write or record your Files to a CD recording drive Type the name you want bo give to this CD or just click Nest to use the name below New files being written to the CD will replace any Files already on the CD if they have the same name Close the wizard after the files have been written D The following dialog will be displayed when all files have been copied Click Finish CD Writing Wizard Completing the CD Writing Wizard You have successfully written your Files to the CO Do you want to create another CD using the same Files es write these files to another CD CD software developed under license From Roxio Inc To close this wizard click Finish B
5. QuickTime Updater EA System Configuration Utility ER Sustem Infrrmatinn M Add to Favorites Cancel Choose Windows Macintosh The name of the selected application is displayed under Use the following program f Use the following program Quick Time Player Spplication 109 Movie Editing Program Same as movie player program Select this option to edit movies using the program selected in the Movie Player Program area Use the following program Select this option to edit movies in the application of your choice To choose a program click Change and select the program from the Select Program dialog Select Select program to edit movies elect program j l Select a program to edit movies E Nikon Capture Camera Con A From A Applications Nikon Capture Editor LA Applications gt Calculator P wa Nikon Editor E Library P amp Chess ii E Nikon Scan Application 7 Nikon r W Clock ae L7 Nikon Scan 4 Manual gt E DVD Player K Outlook Express GB System gt f iCal Yf Paint Users D iChat PictureViewer Application L wk gt amp Image Capture A pmk3 exe ei 4 i a VI Internet Connect y Kind Application QuickTime Player Application I amp QuickTime Updater ath System Configuration Utility ER Sustem Information Add to Favorites Cancel Choose Windows Macintosh The name of the selected applicat
6. Save large previews for NEF files Image files normally include an embedded preview 570 pixels on its longest size If this op tion is checked images saved in NEF will include a preview 1 600 pixels on its longest side allowing NEF images over 1 600 pixels long to display more quickly in Nikon Viewer Hide Tool Palettes when the application is not active Windows only Select this option to hide the tool palettes and Quick Tool palette when another application is activated and brought to the front Show full path in the image window title bar Windows only Select this option to display the full paths and file names of the images opened in image windows Large Previews for NEF Files Selecting the Save large previews for NEF files option increases file size by about 1 MB slightly in creasing the time needed to save images 207 Use this monitor for new images Macintosh only In a multiple display environment select the monitor that will be used to display images opened in Nikon Capture 4 Editor This option is not available when only one monitor is connected Initial image window size Macintosh only Choose the size at which images will be opened from one third screen width one half screen width and two thirds screen width Open with Photoshop Quick Tools button Choose whether images are transferred to Photoshop eight bits at a time Always transfers 8 bit data or sixteen bits at a time Transfers 16 bit data when pos
7. Ctrl F Play Sound IPTC Information Attribube p Exit AlE F 4 67 Editing Image Files Select a thumbnail then click the wi button in the toolbar or select Edit from the File menu to display the selected image in the editing program specified in the Preferences dialog EZ Edit button The editing programs listed are those selected in the Still Image 4 108 and Movie tabs 4 109 of the Preferences dialog If Nikon Capture 4 Editor is selected as the editor for still im ages Nikon Capture 4 Editor will start 4 135 If you have not yet specified or registered an image editing program the Add Remove Editing Program dialog will appear automatically To open the dialog on subsequent occasions see the instructions below Registering Image Editing Programs The Add Remove Editing Program dialog is used to register and also to remove the image editing programs of your choice Click Add to register an image editing program Add Remove editing program Registering additional editing programs allows you to use an Nikon Capture Editor ae f ara Nikon Editor editing application other than the program specified in the aine Preferences dialog Open registered editing programs using Adobe Photoshop 7 0 the Edit button pull down menu or by selecting Edit using rail other program from the File menu PanoramaMaker Large Preview Generator for NEF file Displaying the Add Remove Editing P
8. Opening Folders in the Explorer or the Finder In Windows you can open a folder in Explorer by selecting a folder and choosing Open with Explorer from the Folder menu In Macintosh you can open a folder in Finder by selecting a folder and choosing Open in Finder from the Folder menu Deleting Folders To delete a folder select the folder one level higher than the folder you want to delete The folder you want to delete will be displayed in the thumbnail list area Select the folder then choose Delete from the File menu Deleting a folder also deletes all files it contains 42 Renaming Images and Folders Images or folders selected in the thumbnail list can be renamed individually or multiple im ages or folders can be selected and renamed according to a user specified rule Renaming Individual Images and Folders To rename an image or folder select it in the thumbnail list and choose Rename a file or a folder in the File menu In Windows fenfoeer iii the new name can be entered directly in the thumbnail list On the a Ctri E i z i it using other programs gt Macintosh a dialog will be displayed where the image or folder can be renamed Mas Copy Renaming Multiple Images and Folders Select multiple items in the thumbnail list and select Rename a file or a folder Windows or Rename automatically Macintosh in the File menu The following dialog will be dis played Rename file s Rename file s 3
9. If Off is selected all images will be recorded in landscape orientation regardless of how the camera is held The options in the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Image menu are not available when the D2H is connected 224 Take pictures Take pictures using the camera shutter release button or the AF and Shoot or Shoot buttons in the Camera Control window The Status dialog shown below will be dis played Download folder C User My Documents My Pictures 524 2 MB available on this volume Number of images downloaded in this session 1 Last image saved C My Pictures Img0001 nef Current task Waiting for new images from camera To display a histogram of the current image click the triangle at the bottom of the Status dialog Download folder User My Documents My Pictures 524 2 MB available on this volume Number of images downloaded in this session 1 Last image saved C My Pictures Imq0001 nef Current task Waiting For new images From camera Triangle Q C Show highlights over Also show R a O BEP If the Show highlights over option is checked any areas of the preview image with a brightness over the value entered in the neighboring text box will be indicated by a flash ing border To display histograms for the red R green G and blue B channels put a check in the corresponding box If View with Nikon Viewer or Show it with the Nikon Brow
10. If the photograph in the active window is a RAW image taken with a lens that does not transmit distance information to the camera or with a D1 series camera not equipped to record distance information Vignette Control will be based on default lens characteristics Care may be required to prevent over correction EJ Neutral set At factory defaults the default settings stored in the file Neutral set the Apply button is off xi and Intensity is set to 80 166 Adjust intensity Intensity Vignette control can be performed manually by dragging the Intensity slider or entering a value in the text box to its right Choose a value between 100 and 200 according to the drop in marginal lumination exhibited by the lens in use The default value is 80 if O is selected no vignette control will be performed The Vignette Control Settings Menu Clicking the IE icon in the Vignette Control palette displays the Vignette Control Settings menu Copy to Clipboard Load gave Reset to Default Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Default _ Recent files Copy current Vignette Control settings to the clipboard Select this item to restore settings saved using the Save option A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nvc will be displayed The settings in the Vignette Control palette
11. Purge b Color Settings 3K Preset Manager Preferences 2 Check Advanced Mode Color Settings Settings Advanced Mode m Working Spaces RGB sRGB IEC61966 2 1 Advanced Mode CMYK SWOP Coated 20 GCR Medium Gray Gray Gamma 2 2 K gt m s m Spot Dot Gain 20 m Color Management Policies RGB pop up menu nat Preserve Embedded Profes 1 Gray Profile Mismatches _ Ask When Opening Y Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles 4 Ask When Opening Profile Mismatches section m Conversion Options Engine Adobe ACE i Intent Relative Colorimetric Use Black Point Compensation Y Use Dither 8 bit channel images m Advanced Controls C Desaturate Monitor Colors By C Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma m Description Working Spaces The working space specifies the working color profile for each color model A color profile defines how a color s numeric values map to its visual appearance The working space is used for documents that are not color managed and for newly created documents that are color managed 2 0 Select Preserve Embedded Profiles for Color Management Policies Select Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB pop up menu in the Color Man agement Policies section Remove the check from Ask When Opening Remove the check from Ask When Opening
12. Title Object Name Detail view To switch from the simple to the detail view click the Detail button Click Simple to switch back Adding File Information The information in the IPTC Information dialog will be added to photographs if the Add additional information IPTC field to all files option is checked in the Transfer tab of the Transfer options dialog cs 31 when the pictures are transferred IPTC information will not be added to movie files 33 Caption The caption entered in this text box will be added to photographs if the Add addi tional information IPTC field to all files option is checked in the Transfer tab of the Transfer options dialog 4 31 when the pic tures are transferred In the detail view you can add information in the Caption Writer Headline and Instructions fields Keywords Keywords entered in this area can be added to photographs if the Add additional in formation IPTC field to all files option is checked in the Transfer tab of the Transfer options dialog 4 31 when the pictures are transferred To add keywords to the list in the Recorded Keywords text box click Add Up to twenty keywords can be recorded Categories detail view only Choose a category and urgency level Cat egories can be created in the same manner as keywords Credit detail view only Enter information for Author Author s Position Credit Source and Copyright Notice Origin detail view
13. nization for Standardization ISO standard See also Profile IEEE 1394 A high speed transfer protocol developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics En gineers for connecting peripherals such as hard disks MO drives and digital cameras to a computer via a cable JPEG A standard graphic format designed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group Images are compressed using a discrete cosine transform that takes advantage of the properties of hu man vision which is more sensitive to light in the lower wavelengths to increase quantization at lower frequencies JPEG compression is lossy meaning that information is lost when images are compressed leading to a drop in image quality A lossless compression option is also supported in some implementations JPEG images can be compressed to as much as 100 1 though quality will be significantly reduced At a compression ratio of 20 1 image quality is not noticeably diminished LCD Liquid Crystal Display LCDs are notable for their thinness lightness and the fact that they consume relatively little energy Midpoint Controls the output level for mid tones in the original image See also Tone Tone curve NEF An abbreviation of Nikon Electronic Image Format an image file format developed by Nikon to support high resolution twelve bit RAW image data In Windows NEF files have the ex tension net NEF images can be opened and edited only in Nikon Capture The advantag
14. sired results are achieved Monotone Highlights Highlight adjustment has no effect if details in highlights have been totally obliterated leaving high lights a single uniform color 187 Defining Shadows and Highlights The Threshold slider in the detailed view of the Digital DEE panel determines the bor der between shadows and highlights oe Less Highlight adjustment 4 J b Threshold 4 j gt 190 Moving the slider to the right or entering a higher value in the Threshold text box in creases the range of tones affected by the Shadow adjustment slider and reduces the range of tones affected by the Highlight adjustment slider Threshold slider and text box Tone range affected by Tone range affected by Shadow adjustment Highlight adjustment 1 i Highlights 254 i Threshold Threshold 4 b Try increasing the threshold value if shadow brightness fails to brighten shadows in the desired tone range or if highlight adjustment is affecting too great an area Moving the slider is to the left or entering a lower value in the Threshold text box in creases the range of tones affected by the Highlight Adjustment slider and reduces the range of tones affected by the Shadow Adjustment slider Tone range affected by Tone range affected by Shadow adjustment Highlight adjustment Threshold Threshold 4 j d Try decreasing the threshold value if highlight adjustment fails to i
15. 100 and 100 can be entered in the text box to the right of the slider Adjusting Color Balance While the brightness slider adjusts brightness for the image as a whole the three color balance controls allow the user to adjust brightness for each color individually For ex ample dragging the red slider in the direction brightens the red portions of the image making the image as a whole more red Dragging it in the direction dims the red ele ments in the image bringing out the remaining colors A value between 100 and 100 can be entered for each color in the text box to the right of the slider 179 The Color Balance Settings Menu Clicking the IO button in the Color Balance palette displays the Color Balance Settings menu v i Color Balance Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Neutral Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Color Balance settings to the clipboard Select this item to load brightness contrast and color balance settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you Load can navigate to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nca will be displayed The settings in the Color Balance palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save brightness contrast and color balance settings to a named file These settings can later be recalled usi
16. Colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile will be printed using the closest colors available Other colors are not affected Perceptual If the image contains colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile all colors in the image will be compressed to fit the gamut Multiple Displays Macintosh Nikon Capture 4 will identify and list the profiles for all monitors in an extended desktop display allow ing you to choose a separate profile for each monitor The Color Management Tab Changes to settings in the Color Management tab also apply to Nikon Browser Nikon Viewer and Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 214 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Capturing Photographs Using the Camera Control component of Nikon Capture 4 you can control almost all aspects of camera operation remotely from your computer If Camera Control is running when a D2H or D100 camera is connected or a D1 series camera is connected and set to PC mode pictures taken with the camera will be stored on your computer hard disk not the camera memory card The camera can be operated either directly or using the controls in the Camera Control window Camera settings are displayed in Camera Control This chapter describes the Camera Control and Custom Set tings windows For more information on camera settings see the documentation provided with your camera The Camera Control Window Read this section for a description of the control
17. Curves palette 152 168 177 Custom settings 246 258 D Delete 60 133 Delete selected thumbnails 60 Digital DEE palette 152 186 189 Display profile 112 116 211 214 DVD 78 79 E Editing 68 70 127 150 195 movies 110 still images 68 70 127 150 195 E mail 86 88 Eyedropper tool 155 168 173 176 275 Exposure compensation 235 F File formats 141 196 File names 24 27 43 223 File size 196 FireWire 6 275 Fisheye Lens palette 152 190 191 Flash sync mode 236 Flexible program 235 Flipping images 145 G Gamma 175 275 Gamut 265 275 General tab Nikon Browser 104 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 260 Nikon Capture 4 Editor 207 Nikon Transfer 30 Nikon Viewer 104 Gray point 155 156 See also midpoint setting 155 156 Grid lines 211 H Halo width 182 276 Hand Cursor 127 Highlights 148 169 Histogram 170 225 243 276 Hue 160 242 HTML 98 102 l CE 212 276 IEEE 1394 6 276 Image Dust Off 62 152 162 165 244 Image Dust Off palette 152 162 165 Indicator 151 Information palette 146 147 Installation 6 7 Intensity 182 ISO equivalency See sensitivity J JPEG 44 54 141 145 196 276 L LCD 276 Simulated LCD panel 233 234 Luminosity 146 M Master curve 168 176 Memory card 15 18 19 Metering 234 236 Midpoint 175 176 276 Mired 153 N NEF 64 65 141 196 276 Noise reduction 152 184 185 242 Noise R
18. Epson Stylus Photo 2000P ESC P Where LPT1 Comment Paper Size Letter v Source Automatically Select Open Close Save Save As Create Copy va IPTC Information Orientation Portrait O Landscape Chri Chris Ctrl ShiFk 5 Print Setup 1 OSC_0001 NEF 2 p52 000z MEF 3 p52 0003 MEF 4 p52 0004 MEF Exit Printer type Inkjet printer v Normal Print v Setting up Your Printer Note that the printer must be properly connected and the printer drivers correctly installed Printing with Color Management The printer profile can be selected in the Color Management tab of the Preferences dialog in Nikon Browser xy 112 114 Nikon Viewer Nikon Capture 4 Editor xy 211 213 or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Use output resolution To print images at the size and resolution selected in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Size Resolution palette select Use output resolution 200 Batch Processing Nikon Capture 4 supports automated processing of multiple images batch processing Batch processing is used to automate image processing capturing images applying pre de fined image adjustment settings and saving images to disk automatically It is most effec tive when applied to a series of photographs taken under identical conditions Images are processed in the order taken When using batch processing we recommend that
19. Move file s dialog Copy file s dialog Choose a destination folder and renaming options and described below Destination folder This text box lists the current destination folder To choose a new folder click Browse and navigate to the desired location Rename file s When this option is selected moved or copied items will be saved under new names in the destination folder In Windows this option is not available if the current selection contains both files and folders Clicking the Change button displays the Rename file s dialog where a naming rule can be selected 43 Rename file s Choose method Add suffix to the original file name Suffi Move Sample DSC_O001Move NEF O Rename with new numerical sequence Selecting Multiple Folders Multiple folders can not be selected in the folder tree Select folders in the thumbnail list Voice Memos If voice memos are associated with the selected files the number of items selected in the thumbnail list will differ from the number of items listed in the rename move copy and delete dialogs Voice memos are included in the number of items listed in these dialogs but not in the thumbnail list 45 Adding Folders to Your List of Favorites In Nikon Browser you can add folders containing transferred images to your list of favorites Folders to be added to this list can be selected using either the Favorites tool button or
20. Resize LA Use this button to select the zoom ratio of the slides You can also adjust the aspect ratio or adjust the size of the slides to fit the screen The Status Bar You can control the sound volume on the status bar You can also check the number of the remaining slides and the total number of slides and specify the interval between slide changes in the range of 1 to 60 seconds Volume control Time display control Changing the Size of the Slideshow Properties Dialog You can expand or collapse the Slideshow Properties dialog by clicking the toggle button in the toolbar s Slideshow Properties Slideshow Properties dialog collapsed r b e 3 Toggle button Interval The interval between slide changes may vary depending on the file size of the images displayed 85 Sending Images by E Mail Images displayed in the thumbnail list area can be appended to e mail messages To send images click the button in the tool bar or select E mail from the Tools menu E mail button Settings including the size of the image to be e mailed can be adjusted in the E mail dialog Current e mail program Outlook Express Send image s as individual attachments Resize to small pictures to send Original pictures will be untouched v Smaller Larger Standard screen size 6402480 Send image s as contact sheet Put multiple images in one sheet as attachment Quality setti
21. Select this option to export movies to the HTML album The album will include a olay button that can be clicked to play the associated movie The File Name Tab The options in this tab can be used to modify file and folder names for compatibility with nage Movies Fie None different operating systems Keep the original file name Ke ep the origin al file n ame Change the alphanumeric character which a file name includes in a small letter Change file name for compatibility wi level Select this option to export pictures to HTML stoic eae lai albums under their original file names Change the alphanumeric character which a file name includes in a small letter HTML uploaded to a case sensitive web server may not display correctly unless file names have been converted to lower case Select this option to convert all upper case letters to lower case For more information contact the server administrator Change file name for compatibility with ISO9660 level 1 HTML may not display correctly on some web servers or operating systems if file names do not contorm to the ISO 9660 level 1 standard of an eight character file name with a three letter extension Select this option to convert thumbnail names to thmnnnnn jpg where nnnnn is a five digit number assigned by Nikon View Image file names will similarly be converted to imgnnnnn jpg Reset to Defaults To reset s
22. Where long file names are supported the maximum length is 255 characters file names may not con tain quotes or any of the following characters W Z7 i o y fx 9 lt gt and I Macintosh The maximum length for Macintosh file names is thirty one characters Colons are not allowed 204 Bit Depth Gives the bit depth the number of bits of color information per channel for each pixel in the image at which the image will be saved The 16 bit option is only available if the selected file type is TIFF format RGB and the original image has a bit depth of over eight bits D Begin processing Click Start to put the selected settings into effect and begin processing A batch prog ress dialog will be displayed Minimize button Source C4 UseriMy Documents My Pictures Image adjustments Apply settings already in NEF files Last image loaded C My Pictures DSC_0002 NEF Last image saved C My Pictures Img0002 nef Files saved 2 of 4 Current task RED ED Only show warnings and errors Show file paths i 10 01 2003 06 27 36 PM Batch Started Log area Stop Batch Stop Batch Click this button to stop batch processing before all images have been processed Only show warnings and errors Check this option to display only warnings and errors in the log area If this option is not checked the log will also show the names and locations of the original images captured photographs
23. tings A dialo g will b e displaye d E Do you want to load an image in the upcoming batch to assist in making A A E EE E ase with the process of adjusting settings Click No to adjust settings without open ing an image To open the first image in the source Choose image folder click Load First Image To select ae another image trom the source folder ae click Choose Image The dialog none shown at right will be displayed select an image and click OK A pause dialog will be displayed ad just settings as desired and then click The Batch function has been paused so that you can make changes to the Image Adjustment tools After the changes are Resume Batch to return to the batch complete press the Resume Batch button below processing dialog Apply settings in Select this option to process the images In the selected folder using joint settings created using the Save option in the Settings gt Image Adjustment menu amp 195 When this option is selected a joint settings file can be selected by clicking the Browse button to its right Apply settings already in NEF files Check this option to apply settings previously saved with NEF files If this item is not checked the saved settings will be replacing with the settings chosen in the Image Ad justments section Q Orientation Images processed using the batch option are saved in their original orientation When Apply current settings is selected imag
24. 1394 devices and connecting just the computer and the camera Are you using a recommended IEEE 1394 interface D1 series cameras only See System Requirements 846 For information on your IEEE 1394 interface see the manufacturer s web site Q The ReadMe File Included on the installer CD is a README file containing the most current information on Nikon Capture 4 Please read this file before installing and using Nikon Capture as it may contain important informa tion that could not be included in this manual Should you encounter problems with Nikon Capture 4 not covered in this section please consult the README file for the most up to date information 272 Is the IEEE 1394 interface board correctly registered with the system Windows only Check whether e The IEEE 1394 Bus Controller is not displayed in the Device Manager e The IEEE 1394 board is listed under Other Devices or Unknown Devices e A yellow or red mark appears next to the listing for the IEEE 1394 board If any of the above apply the IEEE 1394 board has not been correctly registered with the system See the documentation provided with the board for information on device registration Nikon Transfer Does Not Start If Nikon Transfer fails to start when a supported camera is connected or a memory card trom a supported camera inserted in a card reader or PC card slot check that the memory card is properly inserted in the camera card reader o
25. 4 0 0 3000 A color space protile defined in Adobe Photoshop 5 0 It has a wider gamut than sRGB and includes the colors found in most CMYK gamuts making it suitable for users involved in desktop publishing The corresponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop 5 0 is SMPTE 240M the corresponding setting in Adobe Photoshop 5 5 or later Adobe RGB 1998 CIE RGB Nikon CIE RGB 4 0 0 3000 A video color space profile established by the Commission Internationale de Eclairage CIE While it boasts a fairly wide gamut it suffers from the drawback that the area devoted to the reproduction of cyan is relatively small The corresponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop is CIE RGB Adobe Wide RGB Nikon Adobe Wide RGB 4 0 0 3000 This color space protile designed by Adobe incorporates most of the visible colors This however has the consequence that most of the colors it can express can not be reproduced on standard monitors and printers The corresponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop 5 0 or later is Adobe Wide RGB The gamut of colors that can be expressed in the above color space profiles is shown in the following chromaticity x y graph The greater the area enclosed by the triangle that repre sents the color space profile the wider its gamut Gamut Wide RGB Bruce RGE NTSC RGB 265 2 Technical Data for RGB Profiles Supported in Nikon Capture 4 The following table shows the gamma values for profiles sup
26. Appendix B Color Matching in Adobe Photoshop Version 7 0 or later Learn how to preserve color space profile information when opening images in Adobe Photoshop version 7 0 or later Appendix C Troubleshooting Read this section for information on what to do when Nikon Capture 4 does not function as expected Appendix D Glossary Refer to this section when you are unsure of the meanings of the terms used in this manual 263 Appendix A Supported Color Profiles 1 Standard RGB Profiles Supported in Nikon Capture 4 1 1 Profiles with a Gamma Value of 1 8 Apple RGB Nikon Apple RGB 4 0 0 3000 This profile is used in desk top publishing applications and in Adobe Photoshop versions 4 0 or earlier and is the typical RGB profile for Macintosh monitors The corresponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop is Apple RGB This profile is suitable tor working with images displayed on the Macintosh ColorMatch RGB Nikon ColorMatch RGB 4 0 0 3000 The ColorMatch profile is native to Radius PressView monitors It has a wider gamut than Apple RGB with a particularly wide area devoted to the reproduction of blues The corre sponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop is Color Match RGB 1 2 Profiles with a Gamma Value of 2 2 SRGB Nikon sRGB 4 0 0 3000 This RGB profile is used in the majority of Windows monitors It closely resembles the RGB commonly used in color television and is also used in the digital television broadcasti
27. Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Auto launch Thumbnails Still image Movie Sound Movie Player Program Use the default photo editing program selected by your Operating System Use the following program QuickTime Player Movie Editing Program Same as movie player program Use the following program Videolmpression Movie Player Program Use the default photo editing program selected by your Operating System Select this option to view movies in the default movie player for your operating system Use the following program Select this option to view movies in the application of your choice To choose a program click Change and select the program from the Select Program dialog Select program to open movies Select program Select a program to open movie files 2 Nikon Capture Camera Con A From Applications ca Nikon Capture Editor fn P 5 LA Applications 3 Nikon Editor Cancel i Library gt gt Mail nikon Scan Application Z Nikon gt Nikon Software r E Outlook Express E Nikon Scan 4 Manual gt PanoramaMaker j f p L System gt T Photolmpression P 0 Yf Paint 1 Users gt Preview gt P amp PictureViewer Application w Q QuickTime Player F pmk3 exe F iTunes L7 Roxio Toast anium 5 2 1 gt Safari v Kind Applicati a QuickTime Player Application E nE App caion
28. D1 series D100 and D2H cameras will display PC in the control panel on top of the camera Some COOLPIX cameras will display a rectangle with a flashing border when the interface cable is connected If these indicators do not appear check the following points 1 Check the power switch and mode dial e Is the camera on e s the battery fully charged To reduce the drain on the battery we recommend that the camera be powered by an adapter available separately when connected to the computer If you are using an AC adapter Is it properly connected and plugged in Is the mode dial set to PC D1 series only Is the function dial set to P S A or M D100 only Is the correct option selected in the USB menu D100 and D2H only Select PTP when connecting the D2H to a computer running Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Select Mass Storage when connecting the D100 to a computer running Windows 2000 Professional Windows Millennium Edition Me or Windows 98 Second Edition SE When connecting the D100 to a Macintosh computer select PTP Verify that the interface cable is properly connected e Is the interface cable securely connected to both camera and computer Remember that IEEE 1394 connectors do not make a click when fully inserted If the cable is securely connected try disconnecting the cable and reconnecting the devices in a different order e Is there another peripheral connected to the IEEE 1394 bus Try disconnecting other IEEE
29. D1h 9 is equivalent to a camera hue setting of 0 0 to a setting of 3 and 9 to a setting of 6 To use the value for hue adjustment in effect at the time the photograph was taken turn the Hue Adjustment check box off Saturation Compensation This option is used to lower color saturation principally of primary colors red green and blue This is a particularly effective when printing when it can be used to adjust satu rated areas of the image Adjustments can be made in ten steps from O to 9 using the slider with higher numbers representing lower saturation principally of primary colors Levels of 8 or 9 can reduce the color noise seen in photographs taken at high sensitivity ISO equivalency settings If the original image was taken with the D100 the default position for the slider will be the value chosen by the camera with other cameras the default setting is O To use the value for hue adjustment in effect at the time the photo graph was taken turn the Saturation Compensation check box off The Sharpening Tone Comp and Color Mode Menus In the case of images taken with D1 series D100 or D2H cameras the sharpening tone compensation and color mode settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken are marked with an asterisk no asterisk will be displayed if Auto was selected for sharpening or tone compensation EJ Color Mode Color Mode settings apply only to photographs taken with D1 series D100 or
30. D2H cameras Mode I which is adapted to the sRGB color space is suited to portraits that will be printed or used as is with little or no modification Mode Il is adapted to the Adobe RGB color space This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it the preferred choice for pictures that will be extensively processed or retouched Mode Ill which is adapted to the sRGB color space is suited to nature or landscape shots that will be printed or used as is with little or no modification 160 The Advanced RAW Settings Menu Clicking the IOE button in the Advanced RAW palette displays the Advanced RAW settings menu emee Copy to Clipboard Load Save e g Advanced RAW Unchanged w Color Mode Unchanged w Hue Adjustment Coriginally 0 gt Saturation Compensation originally 0 1 gt Reset to Neutral Tone Comp Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Advanced RAW settings to the clipboard Select this item to restore Advanced Raw settings to settings saved using the Save option A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive Load volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nar will be displayed The settings in the Advanced Raw palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save current Advanced Raw settings to a nam
31. Delete Sound Page Setup Mac OS X Print Play Sound IPTC Information Tag marking Attribute Mac OS 9 40 Using Nikon Browser Browser Window Operations Working with Folders When the folder tree is displayed in the navigation area and a folder is selected the images it contains will be displayed in the thumbnail list To close the folder tree click the close box in its upper right corner To view the folder tree again select View Folders Windows or Show folder tree Macintosh in the View gt Navigation menu Close box Folders EHS My Documents fy My Albums AS My eBooks hy Music gt My Pictures Bee Imgoooz E Imgoong Folder tree of My Received Fil ofS Pocket PE My C fy My Recent Documer H NetHood Sy PrintHood Sy SendTo feo Start Menu gt 1 images selected 6 0ME 2464 x 1532 wt Navigation Area Thumbnail list Supported File Formats Nikon Browser can be used to view files created with supported cameras and images previously saved using Nikon View 6 Editor or Nikon Capture version 4 or earlier For information on the file formats sup ported see Opening Image Files in Nikon Capture 4 Editor The Editor Window lS 141 Keyboard Shortcuts In Windows you can select folders with the following keyboard shortcuts e HOME Selects the Desktop icon displayed at the root of the folder tree e END Selects the folder or drive displayed
32. HTML file save as JPEG file or down load to PDA devices If the color space of the image s is already sRGB no conversion of the color space will be done Set the color space profiles for opening saving and converting image Tiles Multiple Displays Macintosh Nikon Capture 4 will identify and list the profiles for all monitors in an extended desktop display allowing you to choose a separate profile for each monitor The Color Management Tab Changes to settings in the Color Management tab also apply to Nikon Viewer Nikon Capture 4 Editor and Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 116 The Publish to NikonNet or PDA Tab Americas Only If Don t show this dialog again has been selected in the Module Selection Nikon User Information Upload Preview or Choose Album dialogs during upload to NikonNet you can click the Clear button in the Publish to NikonNet or PDA tab to display these dialogs again This panel is displayed only in version of Nikon View 6 released to North South and Central America Preferences Auto launch Thumbnails Stillimage Movie Sound Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Use the Clear button to reset the Don t show this dialog again setting for preview login and album selection dialog boxes Clear 117 118 Nikon Viewer Viewing Pictures Nikon Viewer is used to view still pictures selected in Nikon Browser Pictures can be zoomed in or out and scroll
33. Recent Image Dust Off settings files up to four are listed at the end of the Recent files settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Image Dust Off palette to the saved settings Reusing Image Dust Off Settings Before pasting or loading Image Dust Off settings into the Image Dust Off palette for another image be sure that the image was created with the same camera used to record the Image Dust Off reference file If the reference file was created with a different camera a warning will be displayed The Settings Menu The Image Dust Off Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Image co Dust Off from the Settings menu n White Balance Advanced RAW Vignette Control b Noise Reduction Curves gt Color Balance Unsharp Mask Size Resolution b Image Dust Off gt Digital DEE Fisheye Lens Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Neutral 165 Vignette Control The Vignette Control palette is used to correct for loss of marginal lumination a phenomenon associated with camera lenses that causes a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph Vignette Control is most effective when performed on images taken at maximum aperture If the picture in the active image window is a RAW image taken with a lens equipped to transmit distance information i e a type G or D lens mounted on a camera that can record this information Nikon Capture 4 will use the lens informati
34. Suitable Images Found If none of the Image Dust Off reference files found is suitable for use with the image in the active window Nikon Capture 4 Editor will display a message to this effect and offer to use the most suitable reference image Clicking Yes displays a list of the most suitable reference images select a reference file to process the image in the active window to reduce the effects of dust 163 Creating Dust Off Ref Photos To create a Dust Off ref photo for cameras other than the D2H Select a CPU lens Mount a CPU lens on the camera We recommend using a lens with a focal length of at least 50mm If using a zoom lens zoom in to the maximum telephoto position Adjust camera settings Choose the following settings e Sensitivity ISO equivalency minimum setting e Image quality NEF RAW e Exposure mode aperture priority auto A e Focal length maximum setting e Aperture minimum aperture largest f number e Focus choose manual focus and set focus to Infinity 3 Take a photograph With the lens about 10cm from a featureless white object such as a wall frame the ob ject so that it fills the viewfinder and take a photograph The resulting Dust Off ref photo will be recorded as an NEF RAW image Transfer the photograph to the computer Use Nikon Transfer A 13 to copy the photograph to the computer Creating Dust Off Ref Photos D1 Series and D100 Cameras Dust Off ref photos can be taken with the D1x D
35. The Windows Display Properties dialog will be displayed open the Settings tab and click Advanced to open the display adapter properties dialog To select a display profile open the Color Management tab and click Add Default Display Profile Options General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management Note Changes made to items on this page will be reflected in Nikon Capture Camera Control and Nikon View Change Display Profile Default RGB color space C Program Files Common Files Nikon Profiles NKSRGB icm Browse C Use this instead of an embedded profile when opening files Printer profile C Use profile For printing Intent CMYK separation profile C Program Files Common Files Nikon Profiles NKCMYK icm Browse The default Windows display profile is NKMonitor_win icm This profile is equivalent to sRGB 211 Default RGB color space The output color space protile used when working with RGB images Is displayed here Click Browse to choose a new default RGB profile If Use this instead of an embedded profile when opening files is checked this RGB color space profile will be used for all images If it is not checked the profile embedded in each image will be used Printer profile Specifies the printer profile to be used when printing images Use profile for printing If this option is checked you can choose a profile for printing by clicking th
36. Tool Palettes To restore the tool palettes to their default positions select Reset Tool Positions in the View menu 151 The settings that can be adjusted depend on the image quality setting in effect when the photograph was recorded Photographs taken at an image quality setting of RAW can be processed to adjust white balance reduce the effects of dust perform vignette control or to alter exposure compensation image sharpening tone compensation color mode and hue adjustment from the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken All images can be processed to adjust tone curves color balance sharpness noise Digital DEE and size and resolution Images taken with an AF DX 10 5mm f2 8G fisheye Nikkor lens can also be processed to reduce distortion image quality Process Palette Adjust white balance White Balance 153 Choose new settings for exposure compensation image sharpening tone compensation color mode and hue ad Advanced RAW 159 justment Reduce effects of dust on the low pass filter protecting the camera CCD Compensate for drop in marginal lumination caused by char acteristics of camera lens Adjust tone color balance and contrast There are two Cune 168 distinct tools for this task the Curves palette which provides precise control over tone and the Color Balance palette which features simpler controls If the image lacks definition you can sharpen outlines using the controls in th
37. Unable to Locate Images after Transfer Check the destination displayed in the Nikon Transfer window 2 3 Appendix D Glossary This glossary provides definitions of some of the terms used in this manual Bit depth The number of bits used to express color also referred to as color depth The bit depth de termines the amount of color information in an image The greater the bit depth the larger the number of colors and the finer the gradations that can be expressed Bit depth can be used to refer both to the number of bits per channel and to the combined bit depth for all channels thus for example an image with a bit depth of eight bits per channel can be said to have a bit depth of twenty four bits An image with a bit depth of one bit has only two colors typically black and white with no gradation between the two See a so Channel Black Point The input value below which all input tones are mapped to the minimum output value by default no color or black Any details darker than the black point will be lost See also Tone Tone curve Channel The component colors in a given color space The RGB color space is made up of red green and blue channels and a master channel that combines the three See a so Color space Clip The percentage of pixels at both ends of the curve that are excluded in an auto contrast operation See also Tone curve CMS See Color management system CMYK A reflective subtractive color model comm
38. View menu The new thumbnail will be displayed in the thumbnail list area Ds OOU IPG OS 0001 TIF You can also create thumbnails by checking Re create thumbnails from actual image data in the Thumbnails tab A 106 of the Preferences dialog 49 Changing Thumbnail Size The size of the thumbnails displayed in the thumbnail list can be changed using the slider in the toolbar or by selecting the desired size using the View Size option in the View menu jl Slider The following five sizes are available Minimum 64x64 pixels Small 96x96 pixels Normal 128x128 pixels Large 192 x 192 pixels Maximum 256x256 pixels Thumbnail Size Images created with certain cameras such as the D1 include only one thumbnail 160 x 120 pixels in size If a larger size is selected the existing thumbnail data will be enlarged to display at the selected size To create a less ragged thumbnail select Re create thumbnails from actual image data in the Thumbnails tab of the Nikon Browser Preferences dialog xy 106 This is not necessary when displaying pictures created with cameras such as the D1x D1 D100 D2H E5000 and the E5700 which include larger thumbnails with the original image 50 Selecting Thumbnails Thumbnail previews of the images in the selected folder are shown in the thumbnail list area Click a thumbnail to select it To select multiple thumbnails hold down the CTRL key Win dows or the Command key Macintosh while
39. View menu the default location for the White Balance palette is Tool Palette 2 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply button a El white Balance i Settings menu Set Color Temperature E a Pop up menu Camera WE Auto Hew WE Daylight wt Direct sunlight k Slider Fine R Adjustment 4 i b 7200 oo Color Cooler Warmer temperature If the Apply button is off turn it on If the Apply button is off the image in the active image window will reflect the white balance settings in effect at the time the photograph is taken Select Set Color Temperature Select Set Color Temperature trom the pop up menu at the top of the palette White Balance White balance can be performed on RAW images only If the image in the active window is JPEG or TIFF the Apply button in the White Balance palette will be grayed out and inactive EJ Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example at a color temperature of 6000K a change of 100K produces almost no change in color while a change of the same amount at 3000K would produce a large Change in Color Temp Mired difference in color Mired calculated by multiplying the 4000K 3000K 1000K inverse of the color temperature by 10 is a measure of 7000K 6000K 1000K color temperature that takes such var
40. When using Nikon Capture 4 Camera control log in as Windows XP Home Edition Professional Computer administrator Windows 2000 Professional Administrators 217 Starting Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control can be started by selecting Show or Launch Nikon Camera Control from the Tools menu in Nikon Browser Nikon Viewer or Nikon Capture 4 Editor or by clicking the kf button in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Quick Tools palette You can also start Camera Control directly by selecting Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control from the Start menu Windows or double clicking the application icon Macintosh Windows Connect the camera Connect the camera to your computer and turn the camera on If you are using a D1 series camera choose PC as the operating mode If you are using a D100 camera turn the function dial to P S A or M Users of the D2H can select any mode other than M up mirror up Close Nikon Transfer If Nikon Transfer starts click the Close button Start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control From the Start menu select All Programs gt Nikon Capture 4 gt Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional or Programs gt Nikon Capture 4 gt Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control other Windows versions f Nikon Capture 4 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control I Nikon View 6 Ke Adobe Photoshop 7 0 1 Internet Explorer 1 Nikon Capture 4 Editor EX Nik
41. and processed images Show file paths Select this option to show the source and destination file paths File paths are not dis played if Only show warnings and errors is checked Exit the batch processing dialog When batch processing is complete the Stop Batch button will change to Batch Com plete Click Batch Complete to exit the batch processing dialog The Log Area If an error occurs during processing a description will be displayed in the log area of the batch dialog Error Messages If an invalid file name or other error is identified in the batch processing dialog a message will be dis played Return to the batch processing dialog and adjust settings as directed in the message The Minimize Button Windows Mac OS X Clicking the minimize button in the batch processing dialog minimizes Nikon Capture 4 Editor 205 Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon Capture 4 Editor To view the Preferences dialog select Options from the Tools menu Windows or select Preferences from the application menu Mac OS X or Edit menu Mac OS 9 Nikon Capture Editor Batch z PETAN Spee About Nikon Capture Editor pture Camera Control Show Current Folder with Nikon Browser Cut 3X Preferences e oa ET Copy Image Adjustments Copy All Image Adjustments 3C Services gt Copy 3C Paste BY Clear Hide Nikon Capture Editor 98H Hide Others X3H Preferences Q
42. are supported e Windows Outlook Express Outlook Eudora Eudora is not supported under Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional e Macintosh OS 9 0 9 1 9 2 Outlook Express Eudora Entourage e Macintosh OS X Outlook Express Entourage X Mail The application used is that currently selected as the default e mail program for your operating system The default program can be changed using the Internet settings in the Control Panel Windows Con trol Panels Mac OS 9 or System Preferences Mac OS X 87 Send Click this button to start the e mail application listed next to Current e mail program It you selected Resize to small pictures to send or are sending TIFF or NEF RAW images the following dialog will be displayed informing you that copies of the selected images will be created in compressed JPEG format It is these copies that will be attached to the e mail message the original images are not affected Click OK to close the dialog and send the images Confirmation Confirm that all nonJPEG files will be converted to JPEG files to be sent Original files will be untouched Don t show this message again 88 Uploading Images Customers in some areas can use Nikon View 6 to upload still images to free on line photo albums at Nikon sponsored web sites At the time of writing this service was available to customers in the United States of America To use this service American users must register with Ni
43. at the bottom of the folder tree area e BACKSPACE Selects the folder one level higher than the current folder in the folder tree 41 Choosing a Folder The folder tree area displays drives and folders in your computer as a tree from the desktop down In the folder tree area you can only select one folder at a time Back button Up One Level button OVO AE Forward button Transfer Destination button You can go back to the previous folder by clicking the Back button in the toolbar You can also select from up to ten previous folders by clicking the drop down arrow on the right Use the Forward button to go back to where you were when you clicked the Back button You can also select from up to ten folders by clicking the drop down arrow on the right Click the Up One Level button to select a folder one level higher than the current folder in the folder hierarchy Click the Transfer Destination button to view a list of the ten most recent destination fold ers for image files that were transferred using Nikon Transfer When you select a folder from the list the folder will be selected in the folder tree area Creating a New Folder To create a new sub folder under the folder currently se lected in the folder tree or thumbnail list select New Folder View from the File menu sp Sele Edit using other programs b Rename a file or a folder F2 Move Copy Delete Del Delete Sound Page Setup Print Ctrl P
44. be chosen from a sub menu of five Rendering 5000K 5 000K options Fluorescent Daylight 6500K 6 500K Flash 5 400K Suited to photos taken with Nikon Speedlights Fine Adjustment Color temperature can be fine tuned using this slider This option is not available when Use Gray Point or Recorded Value is selected for New WB Color temperature can be adjusted by 50 mired Note that color temperature can not be raised above 9066K and that a setting of Flash can be fine tuned in the range of 4277 K 7479K Calculate Automatically The Calculate Automatically option is not available in the case of photographs taken with the COOLPIX5000 or COOLPIX5700 Calculate Automatically may not produce the desired results with all images if necessary use another white balance setting adjust white balance using the Fine Adjust ment slider or sample the image for gray point lt gt 155 154 Sampling the Image for Gray Point Select Set Gray Point Select Set Gray Point from the pop up menu at the top of the White Balance palette 2 If the Apply button is off X turn it on Apply 4 White Balance button Pop up menu R Sample Gray Point Use a single point Ie several points Reset button Sliders Gain values Sample the image to choose a reference point for white balance You can define white balance using a single point or the average of several points Dur ing sampling the values for red R green
45. can be removed by clicking the Remove Tag Mark button Add Tag mark Remove Tag mark See Tagging Images 8453 for more information Printing Images You can print the image currently displayed aaa in the view are a Use the Print L ayout dia Printer Epson Stylus Photo 2000P ESC P Paper Letter 8 1 2x11 inch P Printable area 8 27X10 31 inch log to print the image To display the Print pia SEG Layout dialog click the Print button in the ene toolbar or select Print from the File menu S ko ie For more information on printing see Print a ie ing Images 84 71 Oo Print a picture multiple times 2 Times C Borderless print o Use thumbnail data Draft use only Printer type Inkjet printer Normal Print Printing with Color Management The printer profile used when printing from Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer can be selected from the Color Management tab of the Preferences dialog in Nikon Browser xy 112 114 Nikon Viewer Nikon Capture 4 Editor xy 211 213 or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 128 Viewing a Slideshow You can view the images opened in the view area as a slideshow To view a slideshow click the Slideshow button in the toolbar or select Slideshow from the Tools menu Slideshow button For more information on playing back a slideshow see Slideshows 4 82 in Nikon Browser Sending Messages by E M
46. char acters file names may not contain spaces quotes or any of the following characters WV 77 i Me oat de g a and me Where long file names are supported the maximum length is 255 characters file names may not con tain quotes or any of the following characters W Z7 i o y fx 9 lt gt and I I Macintosh The maximum length for Macintosh file names is thirty one characters Colons are not allowed 24 The Folder Area The Folder area of the File Destination and G REStirttieurn turn Naming dialog lists the folder in which pic Sama tures will be stored after transfer Folder name C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Picture Create a new subfolder for each transfer This text box lists the current destination fold Example Img0001 er To select a different folder click Browse Me ME la and navigate to the desired folder File naming Folder name Create a new subfolder for each transfer Check this option to store images in a new sub folder with each transfer The sub folder will be created under the folder listed in the Transfer text box and named as shown in the Example field For information on changing how sub folders are named see Sub folder Naming below Copy folder names from camera This check box is enabled when Create a new sub folder for each transfer is checked Check this option to transfer pictures
47. clicking on each of the thumbnails You can also select multiple thumbnails by dragging the mouse Selected thumbnails sched 26 2MB Selecting Images To select all images and folders in the thumbnail list choose Select All in the Edit menu To select all images without selecting folders choose Select All in the Edit gt Select Image s sub menu The Se lect Image s sub menu can also be used to select only those images that satisfy a chosen criterion 51 Thumbnail Attributes Thumbnails are marked by icons indicating image attributes Attribute icon There are eleven different attributes ral Description Tagged image Protected image Hidden image will not be displayed in Windows Explorer Unedited RAW image note that images rotated in Nikon Browser are considered to be unedited images Unedited RAW image with large preview created in Nikon NEF Preview Creator NEF RAW image edited in Nikon Capture NEF RAW image edited in Nikon Capture with large preview cre Hi ated in Nikon NEF Preview Creator Dis O01 MEF Small JPEG image less than 640 pixels on longest dimension Movie Image file with associated voice memo c Image file with IPTC file information You can also protect Windows and Macintosh or hide Windows only images associated with the selected thumbnail by selecting Attribute from the File menu Protecting an image prevents it from being deleted accidentally Hidden images
48. connecting the camera for the first time change Image Capture settings as described on page 115 of the Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide 14 Starting Nikon Transfer Nikon Transfer starts automatically when a supported camera is connected or a memory card trom a supported camera is inserted in a card reader or PC card slot 1 Connect the camera or insert the memory card Connect a camera containing a memory card from a supported camera or insert a mem ory card from a supported camera in a card reader or PC card slot For more information see the Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide 2 Nikon Transfer will start automatically amp Nikon Transfer Nikon CAD ocuments and Settings User My Documents My Pictures File destination File naming Original file name Image transfer rule All images Auto Launch Nikon Transfer will only start automatically if Auto launch when connected to a camera or a card the default option is selected in the Auto Launch tab of the Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer Prefer ences dialog A 105 Starting Nikon Transfer from Nikon Browser Nikon Transfer can also be started by selecting Launch Nikon Transfer from the Tools menu in Nikon Browser Starting Nikon Transfer on a Macintosh When Nikon Transfer is started by connecting a camera or inserting a memory card in a card reader or PC card slot Nikon Browser will also start automatically The Removable Disk Dialog Windows XP Home
49. eyedropper tools Automatic Contrast Adjustment In automatic contrast adjustment Nikon Capture automatically selects white and black points that exclude a certain percentage of the brightest and darkest pixels in the image Steepening curves for enhanced contrast the exact percentage of pixels excluded can be specified in the Preferences dialog tej 210 By default 0 5 of the brightest and darkest pixels are excluded producing a curve that makes optimal use of the output tone range while preserving details in shadows and highlights To perform an auto contrast operation click the Auto Contrast button J The white and black points for each of the red green and blue channels will be modified simultaneously and the master curve will be displayed in the Curves palette the master curve itself is unaf tected by this operation Clicking the button with the Ctrl Windows or option Macintosh key held down adjusts contrast only for the channel currently selected in the channel menu 171 White Point and Black Point Sliders The white point and black point sliders can be used to match the white and black points to the histogram displayed in the curve edit display While these sliders can be used to edit curves for any channel the best results are usually obtained when they are used to modify the master curve To edit the white point or black point click the corresponding slider once to activate it then drag it to the right or left a val
50. files Choose method Choose method O Add suffix to the original file name Add suffix to the original file name Suffix Rename Sample imgRename jpg Rename with new numerical sequence Rename with new numerical sequence Prefix img Prefix Number of digits repr gt 4 digits image Sample img0001 jpg Number of digits lt 4 gt 4 digits Macintosh Sample image0001 NEF Windows Add suffix to the original file name Select this option to append the characters in the Suffix text box to the end of the original file name Rename with new numerical sequence Select this option to assign all the selected items a new file name consisting of a user speci tied prefix followed by numbers assigned automatically in ascending order according to the order in which the images are sorted in the thumbnail list area Enter the prefix in the Prefix text box and choose the number of digits using the Number of digits slider Click Start to rename the selected items Selecting Multiple Folders Multiple folders can not be selected in the folder tree Select folders in the thumbnail list 43 Moving and Copying Images Images can be moved or copied between folders by drag and drop or using the Move and Copy options in the File menu Moving and Copying Files by Drag and Drop Images can be moved or copied by dragging and dropping thumbnails trom the thumbnail list to a folder in
51. hidden v Add thumbnail icon L Embed ICC color profile during transfer ay This function only works with images from D SLR cameras when the mode is selected This function only works with images from D SLR cameras a when the mode Il is selected _ Embed large preview image to RAW file during transfer Opening the file using Nikon Viewer will be faster although transfer speed will be slower This function can only be used if the NEF JPEG recording mode was used C Delete original files after transfer is completed _ Embed ICC color profile during transfer C Embed a preview image in NEF files Opening the file using Nikon Viewer will be faster although transfer speed will be slower i This function can only be used if the NEF JPEG recording mode was used with D2H with D2H _ Add additional information IPTC field to all files C Add additional information IPTC field to all files Copy Shooting data Shutter speed etc to the IPTC caption field Note Part of the caption specified in the File Information screen may be lost Cancel eo Windows Macintosh Delete original files after transfer is completed Check this option to delete the image files from the memory card after they are transferred to your computer Files that are not transferred are not deleted In Windows and Mac OS 9 pro tected files will not be deleted Protected fi
52. images This chapter details the operations that can be performed using Nikon Capture 4 Editor Itis divided into the following sections The Editor Window Read this section for an overview of the controls in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor window Image Adjustment Read this section for instructions on enhancing images using Nikon Capture 4 Editor Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences Read this section for information on fine tuning settings in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor window 135 The Editor Window Getting to Know Nikon Capture 4 Editor The main parts of the Nikon Capture 4 Editor window are identified below Menu bar Shooting data area Contains the menus for Gives photo infor Nikon Capture 4 Editor mation on the image displayed Quick Tools palette Contains tool buttons for Nikon Capture 4 Editor 137 Title bar Shows the file name of the image displayed and the current zoom ratio EJ Nikon Capture Editor File Edit View Image Settings Tools Window Help Fi DSC_0001 NEF 25 w These were the settings at the time this image was taken Nikon D2H 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 RAW 12 bit Lossless Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto 1 160 sec F 3 5 Exposure Comp OEV Lens 24 85mm F 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Wik x w Ny p Applica
53. in specific portions of the tone range by adding additional points to the curves for each channel These points can be freely adjusted by dragging them into new positions changing the shape of the curve Steepen ing the slope in a given portion of the curve will enhance contrast in that portion of the tone range Changing the curve so that input levels in a given portion of the tone range are mapped to higher output levels will brighten tones in the affected tone range similarly changing the curve to map input levels to lower output levels will darken tones in the af tected range Adding New Points to the Curve Move the cursor over the curve edit display and click once to enter curve edit mode Move the cursor to the position where you would like to add a new point then click A new point will be added at this position and the curve will automatically be adjusted to pass through this point The position of the point can be adjusted by dragging It to a new location within the curve edit display The image in the active window will automatically be adjusted to reflect changes to the curve Removing Points from the Curve Points can be removed from the curve by dragging them out of the curve window Resetting the Active Curve to Linear The default linear curve for the current channel can be restored by clicking the dj button in the Curves palette Resetting All Curves to Linear To reset all curves to linear click the Z button All curves wi
54. in the Digital DEE palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save Digital DEE settings to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Digital DEE settings Digital DEE settings are saved with the extension ndd Reset to Default Reset Digital DEE settings to default values Recent Digital DEE settings files up to four are listed at the end of the settings Recent files menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Digital DEE palette to the saved settings Save The Settings Menu The Digital DEE Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Digital DEE from the Settings menu clot acai White Balance Advanced RAW Vignette Control Noise Reduction Curves gt Color Balance Unsharp Mask Size Resolution Image Dust Off gt Copy to Clipbaord Fisheye Lens Load Save Reset to Default 189 Fisheye Lens Fisheye to Rectilinear Image Transformation for Use with DX 10 5mm Fisheye Lenses The tools in the Fisheye Lens palette modify images taken with an AF DX 10 5mm f2 8G Nik kor fisheye lens to resemble images taken with a normal wide angle lens This option is not available with other lenses Display the Fisheye Lens palette Select the tool palette containing the Fisheye Lens palette from the View menu t
55. in the Profile Mismatches area of the Color Management Policies section Close the Color Settings dialog Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog At these settings a warning may be displayed when an image is opened To prevent the warning being displayed again select the appropriate option in the warning dialog Nikon Capture 4 and Adobe Photoshop Color Profiles Nikon Capture 4 output profile Adobe Photoshop profile SRGB Nikon sRGB 4 0 0 3000 SRGB Apple RGB P Nikon Apple RGB 4 0 0 3000 Color Match RGB Nikon Color Match RGB 4 0 0 3000 Bruce RGB Nikon Bruce RGB 4 0 0 3000 NTSC 1953 Nikon NTSC 1953 4 0 0 3000 Color Match RGB NTSC 1953 Adobe RGB 1998 Version 5 5 or later Adobe RGB 1998 Nikon Adobe RGB 1998 4 0 0 3000 Earlier versions SMPTE 240M CIE RGB Nikon CIE RGB 4 0 0 3000 ore Adobe Wide RGB Version 5 5 or later Adobe Wide RGB Nikon Adobe Wide RGB 4 0 0 3000 Earlier versions Wide Gamut RGB 271 Appendix C Troubleshooting Should you encounter problems with Nikon Capture 4 check the list on the following pages before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Nikon Capture 4 Does Not Start Contirm that your computer system meets all of the requirements specified for using Nikon Capture 4 OS memory hard disk capacity etc See System Requirements 6 Nikon Capture 4 Does Not Recognize the Camera Verify that Nikon Capture 4 has recognized the camera
56. normally The Function Dial D100 Digital Cameras Only The D100 can only be used to take photographs when the function dial is set to P S A or M At other settings the shoot buttons in the Camera Control dialog will be disabled and the simulated LCD panel will not be displayed 233 Simulated LCD Panel This panel shows the information displayed in the camera s viewfinder with the exception of camera errors Clicking on an indicator in the panel opens the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Con trol window to the tab that controls the selected option where adjustments can be made When the D2H is connected the amount of memory remaining in the camera memory buf fer is displayed at the right edge of the simulated LCD panel This information is updated at regular intervals but temporary discrepancies may exist between the display and the actual amount of memory remaining in the buffer Shoot Buttons Click either of these buttons to take a photograph at current settings AF and Shoot AF and Start When this button is clicked the camera will perform an autofocus and then release the shutter to take a photograph If the D2H is connected with continuous high speed or continuous low speed mode selected A 239 this button will be labeled AF and Start click to perform an autofocus operation and start shooting Shoot Start Click this button to take a photograph If the D2H is in continuous high speed or continu ous low speed mode A 239 this butt
57. of the red green and blue curves is selected these controls can be used to edit the selected curve only Setting the White Point and Black Point The endpoints of the curve are referred to as the white point and the black point The black point for a given channel represents the darkest shade minimum value for that color the white point the brightest shade maximum value By default the input and output values for the black point are zero The darkest shade in the input image may however be greater than zero with the result that a portion of the curve is dedicated to reproducing tones not actually present in the image Increasing the input value for the black point until it matches the darkest shade in the image will steepen the curve enhancing overall contrast without causing a corresponding loss of detail in shadows Similarly if the original image does not actually contain shades corresponding to the maximum value the white point can be lowered to match the brightest shade in the image There are two steps to selecting a white point and black point for the final image choosing the white point and black point input levels and selecting output levels White Point and Black Point Input Levels Input levels for the white point and black point can be set using any of the following three methods e automatic contrast adjustment e white point and black point sliders e direct sampling using the white point and black point
58. of your choice on your computer 13 The Nikon Transfer Window Getting to Know Nikon Transfer The main parts of the Nikon Transfer window are identified below File destination and naming The destination folder and file nam ing method for transferred images are displayed in this area To change the destination and file naming options click Change x s 424 Nikon Transfer x Nikon Wi 2 File destination C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures File namina Original file name Image transfer rule A images l Change Image Transfer rule Specifies the type of pictures that will be transferred from the memory card currently inserted in the camera card reader or PC card slot lS 28 Button NETTS Function 4 Transferoptions Specify the actions to be performed when pictures are transferred Add additional information Specify the information that will be added to pictures as IPTC field to images jee are transferred Ss Chande Choose the type tae pictures to be transferred and g file destination and naming pm Transfer to the computer all pictures of the type selected in Transfer l the Image transfer rule menu Close the Nikon Transfer window The Menu Bar Macintosh The Macintosh version has a menu bar containing commands that replicate the functions of the buttons in the Nikon Transfer window No menus are available in the Windows version Mac OS X Before
59. on all images captured from the camera To ensure that desired results are achieved we recommend processing a test image before beginning batch processing Batch processing can not be used to adjust settings separately for each image instead the images must be opened one at a time and separate adjustments made manually for each image Rotating Photographs as They Are Captured To capture photographs tn tall portrait orientation select the appropriate option in the Nikon Cap ture 4 Camera Control Image menu D1 series D100 only 224 or select On the default setting tor Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu D2H only if Off is selected all images will be recorded in landscape orientation regardless of how the camera is held The options in the Image menu are not available when the D2H Is connected Note that if On is selected for Auto image rota tion when the D2H is in continuous mode the rotation applied to the first image in each burst applies to all images in the series even if camera orientation is changed during shooting 226 Display the Live Batch dialog Select Live Batch from the Camera menu in Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control The Live Batch dialog will be displayed Live Batch Image Adjustments Apply settings written by the camera isc conrad Image Adjustments section Apply settings in Destination Save to C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures Next file name Img0002 Ed
60. pixel after any changes to the curve have been applied The Curve Edit Display Although values for input and output in the Curves palette range from zero to 255 eight bit precision familiar to users of other image editing software the results of any changes to curves are calculated at a precision of sixteen bits This allows twelve bit RAW data to be modified without lowering the quality of the output Resizing the Curves Palette The Curves palette can be resized by dragging its borders Windows or by dragging the handle at the lower right corner of the palette Macintosh The curves edit display changes with the size of the palette allowing you to enlarge the display to a maximum of 256x256 pixels At this size each of the 256 points on the tone curve is represented by a separate pixel granting maximum precision when editing curves 169 Viewing the Histogram The first step in adjusting tone levels and color balance in the Curves palette is to view the histogram displayed in the background of the curve edit display The histogram tells you what tones are present in the original image and in what amounts information that you will use when setting the black point and white point and editing curves The histogram takes the form of a bar graph The horizontal axis gives the tone level with shadows to the left and highlights to the right The vertical axis gives the number of pixels of each tone level found in the image scaled to fit in
61. point is set to a value that excludes 0 5 of the brightest pixels in the crop This produces an optimal dynamic range with minimal loss of detail in highlights To preserve detail at the expense of dynamic range choose a lower value choose O to set the white point to the brightest pixel in the crop To increase dynamic range at the expense of detail choose a higher value Black 4uto Contrast clip 0 50 Yo white Auto Contrast clip 0 50 Black Dropper value White Dropper value Controls the default output values for white point and black point Output for each chan nel can be set to a value between zero and 255 these settings can also be adjusted in the Curves window By default output levels for the white point are 255 for each channel which displays as white on most computer monitors The defaults for the black point are O for each channel which displays as black Dropper sample size This setting determines the size of the area sampled with the eyedropper cursor in the White Balance and Curves palettes You can select a sample sizes of Point Sample the default setting 3x3 Average and 5x5 Average When the sample size is set to 3 x3 or 5x5 the average for the pixels sampled is used Choosing a large sample size reduces precision but also minimizes the effects of noise choosing a small sample size has the opposite effect Reset to Default Click this button to restore settings in the Advanced Color tab t
62. printer profile all colors in the image will be compressed to fit the gamut CMYK separation profile Lists the profile used to convert RGB images to CMYK when saving images in CMYK TIFF format To choose a different profile click the Browse button Output Check this option to convert the color space of image s to SRGB when you sent the image s by e mail upload to NikonNet export as HTML file save as JPEG file or download to PDA devices If the color space of the image s is already SRGB no conversion of the color space will be done Set the color space profiles for opening saving and converting image files RGB Color Space Profiles See Appendix A xy 264 for more information on the standard color space profiles supported under Nikon Capture 4 113 The Color Management Tab Macintosh The Color Management tab is where you can specify the color management profiles used for displaying images on your monitor editing and saving RGB images saving and printing CMYK images and settings for color space conversion Preferences General Auto launch Thumbnails Still image Movie Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Color Profile Settings _ Note Making changes to items on this page will also affect Nikon Capture and Nikon Editor ColorSync Default Profiles for Documents RGB Default Generic RGB Profile _ Use RGB Default instead of an embedded profile when opening fil
63. return to the Camera Control window Stop Batch The Stop Batch button can only be operated with the mouse 229 Time Lapse Photography Using Nikon Capture you can take a series of photographs automatically at a time interval you select Select Time Lapse Photography from the Open the Time Lapse Photography dialog Camera menu 231 Choose whether to focus before each shot 231 Choose the number of photographs to be taken 231 Choose an interval setting 231 Choose whether to save photographs auto matically 23 Click Start to begin time lapse photography Open the time lapse photography 231 progress dialog Yv Follow the progress of time lapse photography in the progress dialog pe Click Shooting Complete to exit the batch Close the time lapse photography processing dialog 229 progress dialog 230 Display the Time Lapse Photography dialog Select Time Lapse Photography from the Camera menu The Time Lapse Photog raphy dialog will be displayed Time Lapse Photography Autofocus before each shot C Keep shooting until cancelled Shots 2 Delay 0 Hours Minutes 0 Seconds Process images before saving Live Batch Adjust settings Before shooting starts adjust the following settings Autofocus before each shot If this option is checked the camera will perform an autofocus operation before each shot Keep shooting until cancelled If this option is checked the camer
64. setting is displayed See the camera manual for details This setting can not be changed from Nikon Capture 239 Lens Displays the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens currently attached to the cam era Depending on the lens type some information may not be displayed If the lens focal length or maximum aperture have been specified manually see below an asterisk will ap pear next to these values Edit D2H only This button is only available when a non CPU lens is mounted PET on the camera Clicking Edit displays the dialog shown at right where the lens focal length and maximum aperture can be entered Click OK to copy the values to the camera AN ENA FocalLength EW v Main Battery Level Displays the level of the main camera battery Green indicates that the battery has enough charge for continued operation Yellow indicates that battery level is low ready a fully charged spare battery pack Red indicates that the battery is exhausted and that no further photographs can be taken until the battery pack has been replaced You may not be able to control the camera from Nikon Capture when the battery is exhausted Replace with a fully charged spare battery pack or use an AC adapter available separately Clock Battery Level D1 series only Displays the level of the camera clock battery Should this display turn yellow or red have the clock battery replaced by an authorized Nikon service representative a f
65. settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken Display the Advanced RAW palette Select the tool palette containing the Advanced RAW palette from the View menu the default location for the Advanced RAW palette is Tool Palette 2 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette E By Advanced RAW pcm 4 Piom je sharpening ee Tone Comp Unchanged Color Mode Unchanged ka _ Hue Adjustment originally 0 gt _ Saturation Compensation originally 0 ob 2 If the Apply button is off X turn it on Adjust Advanced RAW settings Exp Comp Choose a value trom 2 to 2EV using the slider or enter a value in the text box to its right Choose 0 to perform no compensation Sharpening Adjust the sharpness of outlines in the image according to the scene or your personal preference Choose from Unchanged None Low Medium Low Normal Medium High or High Medium Low and Medium High are not available with RAW images taken with COOLPIX 5000 and 5700 digital cameras In the case of photographs taken with the D1 Normal is equivalent to None Y The Warning Button A warning button appears if the image in the active window is displayed at a zoom ratio too low to al low the effects of Advanced Raw settings to be displayed Click the button to view the warning Advanced RAW Advanced RAW can be performed on RAW images only If the image in the active window is JPEG or TIFF the Apply button in
66. settings on the camera Write to Camera Write to CF Card White balance preset menu Select White Balance Preset Number White balance preset data will be written to Preset d 1 v Comment Existing comment for selected preset Write White Balance Settings to x Please select a CF Card from the Following list E Nikon Capture Editor f The file was written to the card a DSe 0004 jpg Tou Be hes e White Balance settings perform the Following steps H 1 Insert the CF Card into Gae and turt nehe 2 Press the MENU button apes EES ae 3 Highlight White bal and pres es te Ams N o eT 4 Bonin PRET the white balan u and press tl pals ele ctor to the right The currently loaded presets will be shi 5 Pre eae multi selector up down left or right to highlight the desired preset Preset d 0 should NOT be pars Press s the e center ol of the o e sal Donio Selec eal ana press td mak seler Forol ne pon a Highlight the desired im s the center of the multi ae ctor white balance value to the current preset close the dialog Cancel Exit without copying white balance to the camera or memory card Write to Camera Before connecting the camera to the computer set the USB option in the camera setup menu to PTP Write to CF Card Nikon Capture 4 writes the new value for white balance to the folder with the highest folder number If this folder already contains 999 imag
67. sion 10 1 5 or later iMac iMac DV Power Mac G3 Blue amp CPU Model 300 MHz Pentium or better White Power Mac G4 or later iBook PowerBook G3 or later RAM e Windows Mac OS X 128 MB 256 MB or more recommended Nikon e Mac OS 9 memory allocation of 32 MB or more to Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Capture 4 256 MB or more to Nikon Capture 4 Editor RM Nikon View 6 64 MB 128MB with RAW images or more recommended 200MB required for installation with additional free disk space of 10MB plus an amount equal to double the capacity of camera memory card available on system disk when Nikon Capture 4 is running Video 800x600 pixels or more with 16 bit color High Color thousands of colors 24 bit KOOIEN color True Color millions of colors recommended Open Host Controller Interface OHCI 13355 compliant IEEE 1394 interface board or Built in IEEE 1394 FireWire interface re Hard disk space RATOC REX PCIU3 USB interface board USB 2 0 Mac OS X only or built in USB interface required for connection to D100 D2H and COOLPIX series cameras with USB interface Direct connection to other COOLPIX series cameras not supported Ta e All functions including Camera Control D1 D1x D1H D100 and D2H cameras e All functions except Camera Control USB equipped COOLPIX cameras Interface Built in USB interface required for connec tion to D100 D2H and COOLPIX series IR cameras with USB interface Direct con n
68. that settings may change when the images saved in Nikon Capture 3 or earlier are opened in Nikon Capture 4 Nikon Capture 3 or Earlier Changes to color balance settings are made in the range 100 to 100 In Nikon Capture 3 and earlier changes were made in the range 50 to 50 A value of 50 in Nikon Capture 3 corresponds to a value of 100 in Nikon Capture 4 178 Adjust brightness contrast and color balance Adjust brightness contrast and color balance using the options in the Color Balance palette Adjusting Overall Brightness The brightness slider adjusts brightness for the entire image Dragging the brightness slider in the direction brightens all the colors in the image making the image as a whole more white Dragging the slider in the direction darkens all the colors in the image making the image as a whole darker and less distinct Unlike adjustments to the midpoint in the Curves palette this setting applies equally to shadows and highlights producing a flat low contrast image A value for brightness between 100 and 100 can be entered directly in the text box to the right of the slider Adjusting Image Contrast Dragging the contrast slider in the direction heightens the difference between high lights and shadows in the image increasing contrast Dragging the slider in the di rection decreases the difference between light and dark portions of the image lowering contrast A value for contrast between
69. the Favorites option in the Folder menu Up to thirty folders can be listed IRRIG B Add to FANOEE S H Organize Favorites My FPickures Birthday Party Summer Vacation The Add to Favorites Dialog To add a folder to your list of favorites use the folder tree area to select the desired folder then click the Favorites button in the toolbar or select Favorites gt Add to Favorites from the Folder menu The Add to Favorites dialog will be displayed Add to Favorites Hame Img i Folder location C Documents and Settings UsenMy Documents Cancel Name Displays the name of the folder to be added to your list of favorites Folder location Displays the location of the folder to be added to your list of favorites If you want to specify a different folder click Browse The name of the new folder will be displayed automati cally under Name Click OK to add the selected folder to your list of favorites 46 The Organize Favorites Dialog To organize folders within your list of favorites click the Favorites but ton in the toolbar or select Favor ites gt Organize Favorites from List Faxvankes the Folder menu The Organize Favorites dialog will be displayed My Pictures Move down Birthday Party Summer Vacation Organize Favorites List Favorites Lists the folders that have been added to your favorites Move up Move down Click to move the selected folder
70. the Browse button to the right of the text box and navigate to the desired location Next file name This text box shows a sample of the filenames jam Naming that will be used when saving the images after processing To choose a new file name click OCA the Edit button The File Naming dialog 5 J E E will be displayed For more information see Between Prefix and Suffix Use sequential number v Nikon Transfer A amp 27 Length of number 4 b4 digits Sample Img0001 Save as type Choose the file format that will be used to save the processed images The following formats are available Use source file type NEF TIFF RGB TIFF CMYK and JPEG Choose Use source file type to save captured images in the format used by the cam era To save images in uncompressed RAW format set the camera to uncompressed NEF RAW and choose Use source file type When NEF is selected compression can be chosen from a pull down menu When JPEG is selected the compression ratio can be chosen from Highest Compression Ratio Good Compression Ratio Good Bal ance Good Quality and Excellent Quality See Saving Images 196 for more details Bit depth Gives the bit depth the number of bits of color information per channel for each pixel in the image at which the image will be saved The 16 bit option is only available if the selected file type is TIFF format RGB and the origi
71. the JPEG file will be embedded in the NEF Tile as a large preview This increases trans fer times but reduces the amount of time needed to display NEF images in Nikon Viewer Add additional information IPTC field to all files Check this option to add the file information specified in the IPTC Information dialog 33 to the transferred image Tiles Selecting this option enables the Copy Shooting data Shut ter speed etc to the IPTC caption field check box Copy Shooting data Shutter speed etc to the IPTC caption field Check this option to copy shooting data to the caption field of images as they are transferred 31 The Creator Tab Macintosh Only This tab available only in the Macintosh ver sion allows you to specify the programs that will be associated with transferred tiles Double clicking a file after transter will open it in the associated program Still image Exif format Lists the application associated with JPG and TIF image Tiles Still image NEF format Lists the application associated with NEF image files Movie Transfer Options General Transfer Creator Still image Exif format Nikon Capture Editor Change Still image NEF format Nikon Capture Editor Change Movie iMovie Change Sound iMovie Change Cancel a Lists the app
72. the Zoom Out button to zoom out You can perform the same operations by selecting Zoom In or Zoom Out from the View menu Windows users with a suitable mouse can zoom images in or out by pressing the Alt key and rotating the mouse wheel Zoom In button Zoom Out button 125 Using Nikon Viewer Zoom Tool Button To select the zoom cursor click the Zoom Tool button The mouse pointer will change to a a Ww magnifying glass with a sign in its center Nikon Viewer DSC_0001 NEF 33 DER Fie Edit View Folder Tools Window Help gt Shooting Data 1 4 images selected 6 8MB 1600 x 1200 m Position the zoom cursor over the current image and click the mouse to zoom in one step To zoom out one step hold down Alt Windows or option Macintosh A sign will appear in the center of the zoom cursor click the mouse to zoom out one step The image will be centered on the point clicked Double Clicking the Hand and Zoom Tools Double clicking the Zoom Tool displays the image at a zoom ratio of 1 1 To fit the image to the win dow Windows or display the entire image Macintosh double click the Hand Tool The Hand and Zoom Tools The hand and zoom tools can not be used at the same time 126 Scrolling the Image If the entire image is not visible at the current zoom ratio you can use the grab cursor to view other areas of the image Click the Hand Tool button in the toolbar Nikon Viewer DSC
73. the curve edit display Histogram button fo Co ass IZ Input 151 Output 151 By assigning the darkest tones in the image an output value of zero and the brightest tones in the image an output value of 255 blacks will be output as blacks and whites as whites making the most effective use of the dynamic range of the output device To view the distribution of tones in the final output image after changes to curves click and hold the Histogram button kd The Histogram RAW 16 Bit TIFF Images Only To reduce display times when dealing with large amounts of image data Nikon Capture 4 may display a histogram containing vertical lines EJ Channel Selection Shortcuts The current channel can also be selected using the following shortcuts e Ctrl Windows 8 Macintosh e Ctrl 1 Windows 98 1 Macintosh Master channel RGB Red channel RGB e Ctrl 2 Windows 98 2 Macintosh e Ctrl 3 Windows G8 3 Macintosh Green channel RGB Blue channel RGB 170 Channel Selection You can modify tones for all colors in the im age using the master curve or select any of the red green and blue curves for editing using the 255 channel menu The histogram shows tone levels tor the selected channel only When the master curve is selected the auto contrast button and white point and black point eyedropper tools apply simultaneously to all of the red green and blue curves the master curve is unaffected When one
74. to a new position C Changing the Size of the Crop To change the size of the current crop move the pointer over the borders of the crop The pointer will change to a double arrow Drag the borders of the crop to adjust its size The size of the cropped image can be adjusted in the Size Resolution palette 4 192 Saving a Selection Unless the image is saved in NEF format only the selected portion of the image will be saved Anything not included in the current crop will be deleted In NEF format the entire image is saved together with information about the location of the current crop 149 Image Adjustment Enhancing Images Before they will be ready for display or output on a monitor or printer images captured trom the camera will usually need to be adjusted to a size and resolution appropriate to the task at hand Other settings such as white balance contrast sharpness Image Dust Off Digital DEE and fisheye lens settings may also require adjustment These adjustments are performed using the image adjustment tool palettes Using the Tool Palettes To display the default tool palettes select Show Tool Palette 1 or Show Tool Palette 2 trom the View menu Displaying the Contents of a Tool Palette To display or hide the contents of a tool palette click the triangle to the left of the palette title Ee 1 Edit Indicator Curves i 1 This IA E color Balance i indicator turns Bl Bil unsharp Masi green if palette set
75. to always upload the files to the most recently used album Always create new album Select this option to create a new album every time you upload the image files 97 Creating HTML Albums Images selected in the thumbnail list can be exported to an HTML album with a user speci tied title When the album is viewed in a web browser the selected images will be displayed as rows of thumbnail images with a caption and other selected information next to each thumbnail Clicking a thumbnail will display the associated image at a larger size 1 Select images in the thumbnail list 2 Select Export as HTML in the Tools menu The following dialog will be displayed Export HTML 1 3 Template Settings Specify the layout characteristics for the HTML export Title Basic layout Horizontal layout Number of Thumbnails per page Columns 2 Rowfs 5 Thumbnail Size Minimum Maximum 4 3 gt Small 96296 pixel 3 Choose a title and layout using the following options Title Enter the title that will be displayed at the top of each page Basic layout Choose Horizontal layout to arrange pictures one or more pictures in a row with a caption under each picture or Vertical layout to display one thumbnail per row with the caption to the right of the picture Choose a background and page style from the samples displayed in the preview list Number of Thumbnails per page Enter the maximum number of Columns Hor
76. users will be able to start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control by clicking the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control icon in the Dock 220 Exiting Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Be sure to exit Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control before disconnecting the camera Exit Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control To close the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window open the File menu and choose Exit Windows or Quit Mac OS 9 In Mac OS X select Quit Nikon Capture Control trom the application menu File Nikon Capture Control Close W About Nikon Capture Camera Control Quit Q Preferences K Services gt Hide Nikon Capture Control 96H Hide Others XH Quit Nikon Capture Control Q Windows Mac OS 9 Mac OS X Disconnect the camera For information on disconnecting your camera from the computer see the document ation provided with your camera 221 Capturing Photographs to Disk If Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control is running when a D2H or D100 camera is connected or a D1 series camera is connected with the mode dial set to PC pictures taken with the camera will be stored on your computer hard disk not the camera memory card Connect the camera to your computer Start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 222 Adjust capture options De Rotate images to match camera orientation D1 series D100 only 224 Take pictures 225 Finish shooting Exit Camera Control 225 Close the Camera Control window 1 Start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Contro
77. 00 w Shooting Data Image Comment Folders My Documents My Albums D My eBooks c My Music Sey My Pictures of Imgo002 O Img0003 O New Folder O My Received Fih O Pocket_PC My C LO My Recent Documer gt NetHood O PrintHood O SendTo H Start Menu seal 8 images 1 images selected 6 0MB 2464 x 1632 2 Select Launch Nikon Transfer from the Tools menu Launch Mikon Transfer Launch Mikon Capture Camera Control Slideshow E mail Publish to MikonMet or POA Export as HTML files Mac OS X Users of Mac OS X will not be able to transfer pictures if Nikon Transfer is started by selecting Launch Nikon Transfer from the Tools menu in Nikon Browser To start Nikon Transfer when the camera is still connected turn the camera off and then on again If you are using a card reader or PC card slot remove and reinsert the memory card 18 If the camera has been turned off Turn the camera on If the camera has been disconnected Reconnect the camera and turn the camera on If the memory card has been removed from the camera Reinsert the memory card and turn the camera on If the memory card has been removed from the card reader or PC card slot Reinsert the memory card Nikon Transfer will start automatically 19 Transferring Images Using Nikon Transfer This section describes how Nikon Transfer can be used to transfer pictures to your computer from a memory card inserted in a cam
78. 00 Professional Administrators Mac OS X The Five Components of Nikon Capture 4 About This Product Thank you for your purchase of Nikon Capture 4 software for Nikon digital cameras The Nikon Capture 4 CD contains both Nikon View 6 and Nikon Capture 4 Nikon View 6 is com prised of three components Nikon Transfer which is used to copy pictures from the camera memory card to the computer hard disk Nikon Browser which is used to browse images after they have been transferred to your computer and Nikon Viewer which is used to view images Nikon Capture 4 contains an additional two components Nikon Capture 4 Editor which is used to enhance photographs after shooting and Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control which is used to control D1 series D100 or D2H digital cameras remotely while they are connected to the computer Using these five components you can transfer pictures to your computer view and edit them and print them all in a single process A CF CARD Existing pictures D1 series D100 or D2H camera connected to computer coe coe Nikon Transfer Nikon Transfer Nikon File destination C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures File naming Original file name Image transfer rule All images Starts automatically when a supported Nikon digital camera is connected or a memory card from a supported Nikon digital camera inserted in a card reader or PC card slot Use t
79. 1 NEF TE D5C_0002 NEF ecent D5C_0003 NEF ts E DSC_0004 NEF a Sample Pictures Open button DSC_0001 NEF NEF JPEG TIFF Files Preview of selected image displayed V TIEF CMYK Images Images saved in TIFF CMYK format can not be reopened in Nikon Capture 4 Editor NEF Files Nikon Capture 3 or Earlier NEF files created with Nikon Capture 4 can not be opened in earlier versions of Nikon Capture RAW Images Created with the D1x The default size for RAW images created with the D1x when opened in Nikon Capture 4 Editor can be chosen using the By default a D1X RAW file will be option in the General tab of the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences dialog lt 5 207 Choose from six megapixels 3 008 x 1 960 pixels and ten mega pixels 4 016 x 2 616 141 The Editor Window Locate the image file Navigate to the drive volume and folder containing the file you wish to open Click Open Double click the file or select it from the Tiles listed and click Open The selected file will be opened in an image window in Nikon Capture 4 Editor Opening Images from Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer With one or more still images selected in Nikon Browser or an image open in Nikon Viewer click the Edit button in the Quick Tools palette or select Edit from the File menu Edit button Nikon Capture Editor DSC_0001 NEF 25 A File Edit View Image Settings Tools Window Help gt Shooting Dat
80. 117 After making changes to preferences click OK to save changes and return to the Nikon Viewer window Click Cancel to cancel any changes to settings and return to the Nikon Viewer window z 04 03 06 08 09 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 Viewing Preferences To view settings in any of the panels click the appropriate tab Preferences Tab Color Management l Publish to NikonNet or PDA Autolaunch Thumbnails Stillimage Movie Sound Preferences General Auto launch Thumbnails Still image Movie Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA 134 Nikon Capture 4 Editor Image Adjustment The Nikon Capture 4 editor component contains a variety of tools for enhancing images including brightness contrast color balance unsharp mask adjustment Digital DEE and fisheye lens settings With RAW NEF images it can be used to adjust white balance and tone compensation to reduce the effects of dust on the camera image sensor Image Dust Off and to correct for the slight darkening at the margins of an image vignetting particular to the field of view of a given lens When RAW images are saved in NEF format image enhancement settings are saved separately from the orig inal image data allowing you to modify settings repeatedly without degrading the quality of the original image Nikon Capture 4 Editor is also equipped with a batch option for automated processing of multiple
81. 180 degrees select 180 degrees from the Rotate sub menu 90 degrees CCW button Image before rotation Image rotated ninety degrees clockwise Flipping Images Use the commands in the Flip sub menu to flip the image in the active window horizontally or vertically Rotating JPEG Images Image files must be opened in Nikon Capture 4 Editor before being rotated To save the changes the image must then be saved to disk If the image is in JPEG format it will be compressed when saved with a corresponding drop in image quality Nikon Browser in contrast rotates and flips JPEG images without decompressing them first and no drop in image quality results We recommend that you flip or rotate JPEG images in Nikon Browser before opening them in Nikon Capture 4 Editor 145 The Information Palette The information palette shows the position and color of the pixel under the mouse pointer To display or hide the Information palette click the triangle in the Information palette title bar 8 150 By default the Information palette is in Tool Palette 1 e Information Color space _ iam sRGB i Ao R 185 x y coordinates __Ty a33 G 177 B13 Red Green Blue Watch Point button avg 160 Average The working color space for the image in the active image window is displayed at Color space the top of the information palette This information is embedded in the file when the image is saved The values fo
82. 1H firmware version 1 10 or later and D100 only Dust Off ref photos can not be created with the D1 or with earlier versions of the camera firmware for the D1x and D1H EJ Camera Shake A slight amount of blurring caused by camera shake will not affect Dust Off ref photos 164 The Image Dust Off Settings Menu Clicking the IE button in the Image Dust Off palette displays the Image Dust Off Settings menu E Bimace Dust OFF Copy to Clipboard Dust OFF ref photo was taken at Load Save 10 1 2003 236 AM Change Reset to Neutral Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Image Dust Off settings to the clipboard Select this item to load Image Dust Off settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate Load to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension ndr will be displayed The settings in the Image Dust Off palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save Image Dust Off settings to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Im age Dust Off settings Image Dust Off settings are saved with the extension nars Clears the name of the current Image Dust Off reference file from the Image Reset to Neutral Dust Off palette
83. 1H D1 D100 Dust Off Ref Photo D2H only Choose this option to take a reference photo for Image Dust Off The dialog shown at right will be displayed With the camera lens ten centimeters four inches from a featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and click OK to record an Image Dust Off reference photo See the camera manual for details The Function Dial D100 Cameras Only Measure White Balance can store more than one White Balance setting Which one do you want to use Preset d 0 v e Mode P 5 or 4 and fill the viewfinder with a white When you press the OK bul aon Le e camera will mesa e the White Balance required For the current Eniranment Yai can use this redy ao sby choosing the appropriate Preset in the White Bal lance Control in the Camera aC a ral Wi D2H Dust Off ref photo When the OK button is pressed the camera will take a dust off ref photo Take photo of featureless white object 10cm from lens This photo may be used by Nikon Capture Editor For Image Dust Off The D100 can only be used to take photographs when the function dial is set to P S A or M At other settings the Measure White Balance option is disabled Set Color Temperature D2H Cameras Only The desired results may not be achieved with flash or fluorescent lighting 244 Edit Image Comment Selecting this option displays the dialog shown at right where you can enter a comment or ti
84. 4 Eitor ccccceceeeeeeeeees 206 TMS T eene E EE SEE E EE EEEE E aunts peu E EE 207 Th etemporary Files TaD errre innean enean Eaa AEE E Ea EENE n EE AEE TATRA 209 The Advanced Color Ta oes s crrrerrsntec asic aes uctassusdutesetnneeuacosa ails eivamainis cn EEEa EEA aE EEE A 210 i E T E E e A E EE EAE IE AA N E E E A T A 211 The Color Management Tab Windows cocccccccciccssssssscvnesssesscnevsssrsecnssssessevsevssesssseinsevsseseueveasrsaeniens 211 The Color Management Tab Macintosh cccccccccicccesceneeseseeccuvsscsssenwdseeseesueesdesranoensevssessusdesonsaenwons 213 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Capturing Photographs cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215 The Camera Control Window Getting to Know Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 216 Starting Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control cccccccccccccccceeseseeee ee ceeeeeeeeeseeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaanaeseees 218 Exiting Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control ccccccccccecccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaae esse 221 Capturing Photographs 10 DISK sesers nanana Ena A AE Taai aa AEAEE SERA 222 Processing Photographs as They Are Captured cccccccccccccccceeee esses eeceeeeeceeeeseseaeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaanaes 226 Time Lapse Photography srne she diana a A E E tend Shuaeed sci 230 The Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control WINGOW cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseseaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaanaes 233 CUSTOM o MN eene a Sactbaes
85. 7 1 e UE E separ lt ian and e Where long file names are supported the maximum length is 255 characters file names may not con tain quotes or any of the following characters W Z7 i o y fx 7 lt gt and I Macintosh The maximum length for Macintosh file names is thirty one characters Colons are not allowed NEF NEF files created with Nikon Capture 4 can not be opened in earlier versions of Nikon Capture Nikon Capture 4 can however be used to open NEF images created with earlier versions of Nikon Capture JPEG Image quality will be affected if the same image is saved multiple times in JPEG format Error Messages If an invalid file name or other error is identified in the Save dialog a message will be displayed Adjust settings as directed 198 Save Options In addition to the settings listed above the following options are available in the Save dialog Bit depth Save as type TIFF Format RGB 7 o B Osbit 16 bit C Open with Adobe Photoshop 7 0 1 Open in External Application Bit depth Gives the bit depth the number of bits of color information per channel for each pixel in the image at which the image will be saved The 16 bit option is only available if the selected file type is TIFF format RGB and the original image has a bit depth of over eight bits Open in If Open saved images in is selected in the General tab of the Preferences dialog the name of th
86. AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec 73 5 Flash Syne Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EY Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Shooting Data area expanded gt Shooting Data Shooting Data area collapsed The information displayed includes the following items The information available varies ac cording to the model of camera Camera Name Date and Time Image Quality Image Size Color Converter Lens Lens Focal Length Exposure Mode Scene Mode Metering Mode Shutter Speed Aperture Exposure Compensation Sensitivity White Balance AF Mode Tone Compensation Flash Sync Mode Flash Mode Auto Flash Comp Digital Zoom Ratio Saturation Control Color Mode Hue Adjustment Image Sharpening Noise Reduction Image Comment Latitude GPS Longitude GPS Altitude GPS Shooting Data Depending on the application and the file format used shooting data may be lost when pictures created with the camera are opened and saved from a third party imaging application 55 Finding Images To view the search control click the Search button in the toolbar or select Show search control in the View gt Navigation menu The search control will be displayed in the naviga tion area Search button Folders button Nikon Br
87. AGES isi iisucsscacucrevenocatsauanagentaanenteeddectiedsnecniunsescenvareuactons 10 Worktlow 4 Batch Processing Studio PROLOGPa PAY ciciccscaiciosavasacacdensnaienoced ndani da 11 Nikon Transfer Copying Pictures to Your COMPUTED ccessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneseaneeseeeenenes 13 The Nikon Transfer Window Getting to Know Nikon Transtel cccccceeeeseesseeneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 SLAP UNIG Nikon anster sisissuaricoseisiies Cseinsians stoi satellite Retsstieedwrtecuansaiiletiiedeaaiuar yd AEO E EA Eai 15 ERNO NIkoN RAMS TOM scares castes pearsall EEE EEE sinied edad dl botanic OERE i 16 Restarting Nikon TransfeT sisenesid serinin i iirinn ieten EEEa AEAEE OERAL E EAEE iani 18 Transferring Images Using Nikon TRANSTOR sxc cc ccsccernesciedesecnderaceansaciacestendmsanxandesinccensseadenmenpenienaend 20 The File Destination and Naming Dialog sssssnnninnssssnsssiniinnnsnssssssrirririureennrnrrrrririrernsrnrrrrrrrrreeee 24 NUN OPUONS ouse aE O dea Reso timed e i odes Rbatbc 29 IP TE NOO eioan EE E i E e a 33 Nikon Browser Browsing Pictures after TranSfer ccccccsssesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesnescaneeeeeeeeeeees 35 The Nikon Browser Window Getting to Know Nikon BrowsSel 00000e eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 Staring Nikon OMG SOP a5 accdrcecarncktentesctaatedatarcachii touts EEE barons conde aE EE ENEE ENE EAER AEEA EaR 38 Exiting Nikon Capture 4 BOWS OF siriarrei inaenea E aA eea EA Eea EEA e 40 Using Niko
88. Advanced RAW Vignette Control gt Noise Reduction gt Curves Color Balance gt gt gt Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Neutral Unsharp Mask Size Resolution Image Dust Off Digital DEE Fisheye Lens 183 Noise Reduction This palette can be use to mitigate the effects of noise that sometimes appears in images taken with digital cameras Reducing Noise Display the Noise Reduction palette Select the tool palette containing the Noise Reduction palette from the View menu the default location for the Noise Reduction palette is Tool Palette 2 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply button e ea Noise Reduction i Settings menu _ Edge Noise Reduction i Warning button 2 If the Apply button is off X turn it on A Adjust noise reduction options Color Noise Reduction To reduce noise a mottling phenomenon that occurs principally in photographs taken at high sensitivities drag the slider to select a value from O no noise reduction performed to 10 maximum noise reduction Edge Noise Reduction Check this box to reduce noise along edges in the photo making outlines more distinct iV The Warning Button Color noise reduction will not be performed when the warning button is displayed Zoom the image in until the warning button is no longer displayed 184 View the results View the results in the image in the active window and adjust set
89. COV Flexible Program a gt 0 Stepts Ir ot Simulated LCD panel Performs the same function as the infor mation display in the camera viewfinder Shoot buttons Click these buttons to take pictures Hide Camera Controls button Click this button to hide the camera con trol panels in the Nikon Capture Camera Control window Camera Control Changes made to settings in the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window only apply to photographs taken after the changes are made not to photographs that have already been taken The controls in the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window vary with the type of camera connected More information on camera settings may be found in the documentation provided with your camera Camera Control for D100 Cameras Macintosh Before using Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control with a D100 digital camera under Mac OS 9 or Mac OS X confirm that the camera firmware is version 2 00 or later Users of earlier versions will need to upgrade the camera firmware before using Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Contact a Nikon authorized ser vice representative for information on firmware upgrades Illustrations Save where otherwise noted the illustrations in this section show the dialogs displayed when the D2H is connected 216 If no camera is connected when Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control is launched a warning will be displayed Nikon Capture Camera Control No camera was found IF you alr
90. Capture ColorSync Default Profiles for Documents Editor and Nikon view RGB Default Generic RGB Profile go Use RGB Default instead of an embedded profile when opening files Change Display Profile CMYK Default Generic CMYK Profile Default RGB color space Open ColorSync C Program Files Common Files Nikon Profiles NKSRGB icm _ Use this instead of an embedded profile when opening files Device Profiles Change Display Profile Ramm a teeta a AEA eam Printer profile Use profile for printing _ Use profile For printing Printer No RGB printer profiles available is Intent Perceptual Intent gt CMYK separation profile C Hep _ Cancel Cox C Program Files Common Files Nikon Profiles NWKCMYK icm Windows Macintosh Folder for Temporary Data The folder chosen for temporary storage in the Temporary Files tab also applies to Nikon Capture 4 Edi tor and Nikon View Changes will only take effect after the program has been restarted The Color Management Tab Changes to settings in the Color Management tab also apply to Nikon Browser Nikon Viewer and Nikon Capture 4 Editor 261 262 Appendices Technical Notes O The appendices cover the following topics Appendix A Supported Color Profiles Read this section for a description of the RGB color space profiles supported under Nikon Capture 4
91. Clicking Cancel closes the Print Layout dialog without printing Printer Paper Printable area These text boxes display current printer settings To change printer settings click the Page Setup button see below Displays the currently selected printer Displays the current paper size Displays the maximum dimensions of the area that can be printed per sheet at current Printable area printer and paper size settings Print preview Check this option to display a preview of how the images will print on the currently selected printer Click the next page button to page through the selected images Printing with Color Management The printer profile used when printing from Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer can be selected from the Color Management tab of the Preferences dialog in Nikon Browser lS 112 114 Nikon Viewer Nikon Capture 4 Editor lS 211 213 or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 71 Copies Windows only Choose the number of copies that will be printed You can print anywhere from 1 to 100 copies In the Macintosh version the number of copies is not displayed in the Print Layout dialog To specify the number of copies click Print A confirmation dialog will be displayed click Yes to proceed with printing and specify the number of copies Page Setup Click to display a Printer Settings dialog in which you can modify the printer and paper set tings If you are using a Macintosh the appearance of this d
92. Date Created 10 01 2003 Transmission Reference Title 0bject Name Detail view For more information on the IPTC Information dialog see IPTC Information in Nikon Transfer 33 File Information from Nikon Browser IPTC information displayed in Nikon Browser cannot be edited Note that file information is not at tached to movies 59 Deleting Image Files To delete image files in Nikon Browser select the associated thumbnails in the thumbnail list area and select Delete from the File menu You can attain the same results by pressing the DELETE key Windows or COMMAND DELETE keys Macintosh File Wew Folder Ctrl M VIEW Edit Ctrl E Edit using other programs Rename a file or a folder FZ Move Copy Delete Delete Sound Page Setup Print Ctrl F A confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes to proceed with deletion Confirm File Delete If there are any protected images among the images selected for deletion the dialog shown below will appear Click Yes to proceed with deletion Confirm File Delete The file DSC 0001 NEF is 4 read only file Are you sure you want bo 2 move it to the Recycle Bin If a folder thumbnail is selected in the thumbnail list the above operation will delete the folder and all its contents VY Deleted Image Files Deleted image files are moved to the Recy
93. Dynamic AF Mode in Single Servo AF Sas D100 _ Activate the AF assist illuminator D100 248 The Battery Pack Area D100 with MB D100 Multi Function Battery Pack Only Item Custom Setting PAF button S S 5 Other Items Item Camera Custom Setting EV Steps for Exposure Control ISO Step Value D1x D1H Center weighted metering area 249 The Page 2 Tab The Page 2 tab contains the following settings Custom Settings i v C AE Lock when Shutter Button is pressed half way 7 C Exchange functions for Front and Rear Command Dials 12 C Easy Exposure Compensation 13 C Anti Mirror Shock Mode 5 Disable Shutter Button if no CF Card is present 34 LCD Display C Always use LCD illumination 17 C Zoom Playback while writing images 36 Image Review 1 Photograph is not Displayed Monitor off delay 18 20 seconds Display mode 27 Image Only File number sequence 29 Off Rear Control Panel Display 35 I50 Sensitivity The Viewfinder Area D100 Only Item Custom Setting Focus area illumination Show grid lines The LCD Display Area Item Camera Custom Setting i a D1 series Always use LCD illumination D100 6 Monitor off delay D100 Display mode Other Items Item Camera Custom Setting AE Lock when Shutter Button is pressed halfway Exchange functions for Front and Rear Command Dials Easy Exposure Compensation Di
94. E 127 TAg E eene E E A E a a E E a 128 FAME MAVEN CS ennie a Ea EAA E EE EAE AATA 128 Viewing a SIdeshOW oosina A A ARA EAR Ea ARAE AA RSA 129 Sending Messages by E Mail cccccccccccccceeeseseeeececeeeeceeeeeee sees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaaaaeneeeeeees 129 Uploading Images Amercias Only ccccccccsccessescssececceceetsesteteeeseteneteteeseesseseseeececeeeeeeeeeeees 129 Displaying SIV OO UNG OA As sses a a A i pha niseodiiuiheeadadlaidiaremadhianaddan donnie 130 Viewing File WATORMATION 221012 tacsccmnancaetunrins sai aA Aa aa Aaaa 130 Opening the Current Folder in Nikon Browser cccccccceceseeseeceeeceeceeeesesseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeseeeeeeeeees 13 Window Menu Options in Nikon Browser and NIKON Viewer cccccccccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaenees 131 Deleting Image FICS cnicsis cisccanonsaccdmediasiioncdinensdnddcannadiedadsonsdandteanstisuiaddonadaisdtennstcuindubandiwesiewandedkaudindonncs 133 Nikon Viewer Preferences Fine TUNING NIKON VieWEL ccccsessnceceeeeeeeeeeesessceesesenenaeeeeeeess 134 Nikon Capture 4 Editor Image Adjustment ccceceseeeeee cece ence ee eeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeaeaeseneeeeseananas 135 The Editor Window Getting to Know Nikon Capture 4 Editor ccccccceeeeeeseeneeeseeeeeeeeees 136 Staring Nikon Capture Ay EGIL OF lt cxcintouicataneitecxsontotestacahsnanuktoenionued Usdiens teanbiloienttiegaucsdadauaainetbenpenadn 138 Exiting Nikon C
95. EY Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Folders My Documents O My Albums D My eBooks My Music f My Pictures D Img0002 O Img0003 O New Folder O My Received Fih O Pocket_PC My C B My Recent Documer O NetHood O PrintHood O SendTo H Start Menu 8 images 1 images selected 6 0MB 2464 x 1632 23 The File Destination and Naming Dialog To choose a destination folder and file naming method for images before transfer click the Change button in the File destination and naming area of the Nikon Transfer dialog File destination C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures Change button File naming Original file name Image transfer rule ill images The File Destination and Naming dialog will be displayed File Destination and Naming File destination Folder name C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Picture Create a new subfolder for each transfer Example Img0001 C Copy folder names from camera File naming Original file name Change Image transfer rule File Attribute Not specified File Date Date not specified Any changes made in the File Destination and Naming dialog will be reflected in the File destination and naming area of the Nikon Transfer window Y File Naming Conventions Windows n environments that do not support long file names the maximum length is eight
96. Edition Windows XP Professional When a camera is connected to a NIKON D2H E computer running Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional or a memory card is inserted in a card reader or card slot connected to a computer running Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional a Removable Disk dialog may be displayed Select Copy pictures to a folder on my computer using Nikon View 6 and click OK to display the Nikon Transfer window For more information on the Removable Disk dialog see pages 30 31 of the Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide Windows can perform the same action each time you insert a disk or connect a device with this kind of file E Pictures What do you want Windows to do LA Print the pictures using Photo Printing Wizard Q View a slideshow of the images 7 using Windows Picture and Fax Viewer f Copy pictures to a folder on my computer J tS A B wiza using Microsor ocanner and Lamera zare UDEN folder to view nes Cl Always do the selected action Mass Storage Camera connected Select the program to launch for this action Copy pictures to a folder on my computer sing Microsoft Scanner and Camera Wizard Copy pictures to a folder on my computer sing Nikon View 6 Cl Always use this program for this action PTP Exiting Nikon Transfer The Nikon Transfer window will close automatically when transfer is complete and the Nikon Browser window will
97. Folder View Close Edit Edit using other program Get info disk or card Eject Burn Disc Rename automatically Move Copy Burn Disc Close Displayed Image Delete Delete Sound Burn Disc In PIONEER DVD RW DVR 104 Page Setup Print Ready to burn Play Sound IPTC Information Tag marking Attribute i Eject f Cancel 78 Insert a disk in the CD R W or DVD R W drive and click Burn The following dialog will be displayed while files are copied JOC Burning Burning to the PIONEER DVD RW DVR 104 drive Writing track 1 f Stop 4 Once all the files have been copied the disk will be ejected automatically To copy the same files to another disk repeat steps 3 5 Otherwise delete the contents of the Burn Disc folder Inserting a Disk Wait until the Burn Disc dialog is displayed before inserting a disk Disk Space A disk can not be created if the size of the Burn Disc folder exceeds the capacity of the disk The size of the Burn Disc folder can be viewed in the status bar when the Burn Disc folder is selected in the folder tree 79 Creating JPEG Copies The Copy and Resize as JPEG file s option in the Tools menu can be used to create JPEG copies of selected TIFF and NEF RAW at a specified size compression rate image quality or to create resized copies of JPEG images at a new compression rate Select the images in the t
98. G and blue B for the pixel under the cursor will be shown in the White Balance palette Refer to these values when selecting the point or points to be sampled Using a Single Point to Define White Balance After selecting Use a single point click Start The cursor will take the shape of an eyedropper gf when moved over the image in the active window Click a point that you would like to appear a neutral gray color in the final image The new value for white balance will be reflected in the image in the active window Using the Average of Several Points to Define White Balance After selecting Average several points click Start The cursor will take the shape of an eyedropper gf when moved over the image in the active window You can then sample points that should be a neutral gray color in the final image If you select more than one point the average will be used to determine white balance After sampling all the desired points click Stop The new value for white balance will be reflected in the image in the active window Sample Size The size of the area sampled with the eyedropper cursor can be set using the Dropper sample size option in the Advanced Color tab of the Preferences dialog 155 Gain for the red and blue channels will be adjusted based on the points sampled changing the slope of the red and blue tone curves and the position of the red and blue sliders gt El white Balance Set Gray Point wt Sample Gray Point
99. Imgoo02 O Imgoo03 D Birthday Party O Summer Vacation E My Received Files i ess Thumbnail list a i gt o DR as 3 images 1 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 1200 Note also that a folder icon is displayed in the thumbnail list area if the current folder contains sub folders Folder icon 1600 x 1200 To display the contents of the folder in the thumbnail list area select the folder icon in the thumbnail list area and click the View button in the toolbar The folder will be selected in the folder tree area Auto Image Rotation D2H Only Tall portrait orientation photographs taken with On the default setting selected for Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu will be displayed in portrait orientation Photographs taken with the D2H in the horizontal shooting position or with Off selected for Auto image rotation will be dis played in wide landscape orientation Creating Thumbnails Windows In the Windows version of Nikon View 6 thumbnails will be created automatically when no thumbnail data are present in the image file 48 Creating Thumbnails Macintosh Sometimes a generic file icon is displayed instead of a thumbnail in the thumbnail list area This is be cause some image editing programs remove the thumbnail data appended to the image file If this happens select the generic thumbnails in the thumbnail list and choose Create thumbnails from actual image data from the
100. Knowledge This manual assumes knowledge of operations common to Windows and Macintosh envi ronments Refer to the documentation provided with your computer for more information on operations specific to your operating system Illustrations This manual is for use with both Windows and Macintosh versions of Nikon Capture 4 While the majority of the illustrations in this manual show the Windows versions save where oth erwise noted the operations described apply to both operating systems Depending on the operating system used dialogs and menus may differ slightly from those shown here The ReadMe File Be sure to read the ReadMe file on the Nikon Capture 4 installer CD as it may contain im portant information that could not be included in this manual Camera Control for D100 Cameras Macintosh Before using Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control with a D100 digital camera under Mac OS 9 or Mac OS X confirm that the camera firmware is version 2 00 or later Users of earlier versions will need to upgrade the camera firmware before using Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Contact a Nikon authorized ser vice representative for information on firmware upgrades Windows XP Home Edition Professional Windows 2000 Professional Mac OS X Installing and using Nikon Capture 4 under a multi user operating system requires Administrator privi leges When using Nikon Capture 4 log in as Windows XP Home Edition Professional Computer administrator Windows 20
101. Live Batch Download Folder C My Documents My Pictures 523 8 MB available on this volume Image adjustments Apply camera settings Last image saved Images saved 0 Download Task Waiting for new images From camera Batch Task None Stop Batch Take photographs Take photographs using the camera shutter release button End batch processing Once you have finished taking photographs click Stop Batch to end batch processing If the Batch Task text box shows that images remain to be processed a warning will be displayed Click Yes to exit without saving unprocessed images or No to process and save the images before returning to the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control dialog Q Apply Settings Written by Camera Versus Save Unmodified Files The Apply settings written by camera option saves images in the working output color space se lected in the Color Management tab of the Preferences dialog xy 211 213 The working color space is not applied to images saved using the Save Unmodified Files option The Minimize Button Windows Mac OS X Clicking the minimize button in the progress dialog minimizes Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control The Warning Button If an error occurs during shooting a warning button will appear at the bottom of the Live Batch dialog Clicking this button will display a message End shooting and close the Live Batch dialog as directed An error log will be displayed click OK to close the log and
102. Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer side by side in non overlapping windows 131 Distam AI I PERA Y A ee sina N con Viewer Display one line of thumbnails at top The Nikon Browser window Is adjusted to display a single horizontal line of thumbnails above the Nikon Viewer window Display one line of thumbnails at side The Nikon Browser window Is adjusted to display a single vertical line of thumbnails to the left of the Nikon Viewer window amp Nikon Browser C Documents and SettingsWser My Documents My Pictures Img0002 o on Viewer DSC_000 33 Fie Edt View alien ten Folder Tools Window Help File Edt View Fie Edt View Folder Tools Window Help Image Folder Tools wien Hep 2S eS iB E N D eL T ocal Length 24 White Balance Auto Color t Mode Maia sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 081 Baest de Programmed Auto AF Mode rMo nual RAW 12b Lossless Metering Mode MultiPattem Ton piens solved mage Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 60 sec 4 Fash Syne Mode NotAttached Noss Reductor OFF Exposure Comp 0 EV Lens 24120mm1 355 6D Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment 7 0001 _ Dsc o001 PG 7 as WON 17 37 08 1 RAW 12b ge Size i med Au Lossless le Mul Patten sharpening Auto Large 2484 x 1632 ani Flach Sy me Mode Not Attached Nose Hecustory OFF posure Comp 0 EV Lens 24 120mm f 3 55 6D Sensitivity ISO 200 2 8 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 1200 One ine ai thumbnails
103. Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window Measure White Balance Fine Tune White Balance Direct sunlight 4 gt ook Shade 4 J gt 00K Cloudy 0 J 00k Incandescent 4 J gt oik Fluorescent d J m ok Flash 4 J gt 00k Addto Auto 4 J gt oina Set White Balance Color Te x Color Temperature Use this option to measure preset white balance If the camera currently connected supports multiple values for preset white balance the setting that will be used to store the measured value can be chosen from the pop up menu at the top of the dialog Adjust camera settings as described in the section on preset white balance in the camera user s manual and click OK to measure a value for white balance Measure White Balance OEE ENET DME TESE VEEG IED EET Use manu al Focus and auto exposure Exposure Mode P S or A and fill the viewfinder with a white object ie r When you press the OK button the camera will mea oe a Wis Balance requi rod fori the current pa olla focus and aito Exposure esos ke Mode RYS 0f A and Athe vennad weha wite environment rate this measure ed value by chor aa set in the White aap e Contr ah the Camera Control Window bala nya ee sete P zoan ue will me mome e the ie lance r required for the current ale as Ey choosing the riate Preset i nthe White Bala ee olin in the camara Contr rl Window D1x D
104. Nikon En Nikon Capture 4 User s Manual Notices e No part of the manuals included with this prod e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages uct may be reproduced transmitted transcribed resulting from the use of this product stored in a retrieval system or translated into any While every effort has been made to ensure that language in any form by any means without the information in these manuals is accurate and Nikon s prior written permission complete we would appreciate it were you to e Nikon reserves the right to change the specific bring any errors or omissions to the attention ations of the hardware and software described of the Nikon representative in your area address in these manuals at any time and without prior provided separately notice Package Contents Before using this product check that the package contains the items listed below Contact your retailer or local Nikon representative should you find that any of these items are missing or damaged e Nikon Capture 4 installer CD e Nikon Capture 4 User s Manual this manual e Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide e User registration card USA only Trademark Information Apple the Apple logo Macintosh Mac OS Power Macintosh PowerBook and FireWire are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Power Mac iMac iBook and Finder are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Internet Explo
105. Not lost Not lost Lost Lost Highlights and Shadows Before saving images in a format other than NEF adjust settings to avoid losing highlights or shadows in large areas of the image Information lost through editing can not be recovered once an image is saved in a format other than NEF Keyboard Shortcuts Press L to view or hide lost highlights S to view or hide lost shadows 148 Selecting a Crop Using the crop tool you can select a portion of an image to be saved in a separate Tile If no selection is made the entire image will be saved Click the if button or select Crop Cursor from the View menu When the mouse is moved over the image area in the active window it will change to Ge Make a selection Drag the mouse over the image in the active window to make a selection The area out side the selection will be masked to show that it will be cropped Nikon Capture Editor DSC_0001 NEF 25 f ER le File Edit View Image Settings Tools Window Help om OX gt Shooting Data Cancelling the Current Crop To cancel the current crop double click anywhere in the image window The selection may not be cancelled if Keep the output size is selected in the Size Resolution palette Yj 192 Moving the Crop To move the crop over a different part of the image move the pointer over the crop The pointer will change to a I Windows or amp cursor Macintosh Drag the crop to move it
106. OLPIX Cameras Pictures can be marked for transfer using the camera transfer button or the Transfer or Auto Transfer options in the camera menus Some cameras do not support transfer marking see the documentation provided with your camera for details Sound Files Only voice memos appended to photographs using the camera voice memo option supported with cameras such as the D2H and COOLPIX 5400 will be copied to the computer Other sound files will not be transferred 22 Cancelling Transfer To cancel transfer of the image files click Cancel or press Escape When you are trans ferring multiple image files the images that have already been transferred at the time transfer is cancelled are saved in the destination folder After Transfer When transfer is completed Nikon View will perform the action specified in the General tab 30 of the Transfer Options dialog By default transferred images will be dis played in Nikon Browser Nikon Browser C Documents and SettingsWser My Documents Wy Pictures img0001 File Edit view Image Folder Tools Window Help y Shooting Data Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0
107. Only Nikon Capture 4 Editor supports a wider range of values for gain than does the D2H When white bal ance settings are copied to the camera values that exceed the range of the D2H a will automatically be adjusted to values supported by the camera Choose values between 0 1 and 2 when using the Write setting to camera option Q Gain The values for red and blue gain chosen in the White Balance palette are multiples of the value set for gain when the photograph was taken 156 Choose an option The dialog shown at right will be dis played Click Write to camera Write to CF card or Cancel Write to camera The dialog shown at right will be dis played Choose a preset from the pop up menu and click OK to replace the selected preset with the white bal ance value in effect in the White Balance palette The new value for the selected preset can be contirmed from the camera or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Write to CF card The dialog shown at right will be dis played Choose the drive containing the camera memory card from the pop up menu and click OK to copy the new white balance value to the camera mem ory card A dialog showing the name of the new file will be displayed click OK to Write White Balance Settings to Camera The White Balance settings can be written directly to the camera s memory if the camera is connected or to a CF Card IF they are written to a CF Card additional steps will be required to use these
108. Page Setup Print Ctrl P Play Sound IPTC Information Ctrl J Tag marking gt Attribute gt Exit Alt F4 Windows EW Close Edit E Edit using other program gt Rename a file or a folder Kiowe Copy Close Displayed Image Delete Delete Sound 6 42 Page Setup Print Play Sound IPTC Information Tag marking Attribute Mac OS 9 Nikon View 6 About Nikon View 6 Preferences K Services b Hide Nikon View 6 36H Hide Others CH Quit Nikon View6 80 Mac OS X 123 Using Nikon Viewer Taking a Closer Look To display a still image in the view area of Nikon Viewer double click the associated thumb nail Nikon Viewer can not be used to view movies Only one image can be displayed at a time You can zoom in on and out from images displayed in the viewer Image area iw a i e s RAW F 1 4 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 1200 Status bar Nikon Viewer displays only one image at atime The status bar shows the number of the images currently opened in Nikon Viewer and the status of the image displayed in the view area RAW JF 1 4 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 1200 Sn If more than one image is selected the Previous Image Selected and Next Image Selected buttons can be used to display the other images The order of display is the same as the order of display in the thumbnail list area of Nikon Browser Previous Image Selected button ab
109. QX Digital DEE J tings have been modi Resolutior c i paaue fied for the image in a the active window i g Color Balance gt Wunsharp Mask Apply B pply Button Bd vioital vez Settings Menu Button Changes to settings only take effect K i Click this button to dis 5 when the palette Apply button is play the settings sub checked except in the vignette control Digital DEE and fisheye IEP AA where palette lens palettes the Apply button is OETI settings can be saved checked by default Ifthe Apply OEE loaded or reset button is crossed out lt the ef fects of the settings in the palette will not be visible in the image window F Changing Palette Order To change the order of palettes in the tool palette window click a tool palette title bar OE H Title bar and drag it into a new position B Blunsharp Mask gt 4 Digit Tool Palette 1 gt ates gt Color Balance gt Elunsharp Mask gt x Tool Palette 1 P H color Balance gt El Curves s gt Wunsharp Mask ie PB Digital DEE DE The Size Resolution Palette The Size Resolution palette does not have an Apply button Changes to settings in the Size Resolution palette are always visible in the active window 150 Opening Tool Palettes in Separate Windows Tool palettes can be opened in a separate window by clicking the palette title and dragging it outside the current window to create a new tool palette window co
110. Quick Time Player Application Change 111 The Color Management Tab Windows The Color Management tab is where you specify the color management profiles used for displaying images on your monitor editing and saving RGB images and saving and printing CMYK images Preferences Auto launch Thumbnails Stillimage Movie Sound Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Note Making changes to items on this page will also affect Nikon Capture and Nikon Editor Change Display Profile Default RGB color space C Program Files Common Files Nikon Profiles NKsRGB icm C Use this instead of an embedded profile when opening files Printer profile C Use profile for printing CMYK separation profile c Program Files Common Files Nikon Profiles NKCMYK icm Output C Convert image s to sRGB color space when they are e mailed uploaded to NikonNet PDA or converted HTMLAJPEG format Change Display Profile To choose a display profile click Change Display Profile The Windows Display Prop erties dialog will be displayed open the Settings tab and click Advanced to open the display adapter properties dialog To select a display profile open the Color Management tab and click Add Default RGB color space The output color space profile used when working with RGB images is displayed here Click Browse to choose a new default RGB profile If Use this inst
111. RGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EY Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Shooting Data area expanded gt Shooting Data Shooting Data area collapsed For more information on the shooting data see Displaying Shooting Data 8 55 in Nikon Browser Viewing File Information To display the file information for the image displayed in the view area select IPTC Infor mation trom the File menu The IPTC Information dialog will be displayed For more infor mation see Viewing File Information 8458 in Nikon Browser 130 Opening the Current Folder in Nikon Browser To open the folder containing the current image in Nikon Browser select Open with Browser in the Folder menu Window Menu Options in Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer The options in the Window menu can be used to organize the display in Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer Cascade Horizontal Vertical Display one line of thumbnails at top Fe Display one line of thumbnails at side Fo Cascade Arrange Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer in overlapping windows Horizontal Arrange Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer one above the other in non overlapping win dows Vertical Arrange
112. Seta da atte EAE RA EE E ERN 246 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 259 Te General TaD csi enh cheered en lida E A R 260 The Temporary Fles TaD stsicsiinicsinaicentinendadneiies deulsnedauiedodnsthaladsaeameadladdiidonsadaacadiaadindoedineddteumieudkamdhadontosinds 261 The Color Management Tab asacwecsucncsasctacneienascieanensnanrdadawaddsusenatadaedsnadnideascibinekuadoadinddhedaddeddewsaasdconsie 261 Appendices Technical Notes scaisnssessiccdessiceadescnndasvavenssdtewevnantnwenwandescannswadaveardadervavtementawsnsideedecaiads 263 Appendix A Supported Color Profiles 00csssesssesesesessseseseeeceescseseeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeesenenetenens 264 1 Standard RGB Profiles Supported in Nikon Capture 4 eesseessesserseseesrsesenesrnrnrrrnrsrrsrnrnnrnnn 264 2 Technical Data for RGB Profiles Supported in Nikon Capture 4 oo cece ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 266 Appendix B Color Matching in Adobe Photoshop Version 7 0 or Later ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 267 Step 1 Choosing a Monitor Profile cece erence entree ene ober eee e eee e eee e tet tteteteteneeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 267 Step 2 Adjusting Settings in Adobe Photoshop sesssssssssrrrrnresrsssssrnrrrrrirrorsssarrnrrrerirssssenns 270 Appendix C Troubleshooting ssssssssnnnnnnnersessssrrnnnnnrenrsrssrsnnnnnrnrrnrsnnsnnnnnnnrtrennnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 272 Appendix D Glossa V sapasigsdecee cin euciada
113. Tokyo Prefix Identifier Suffix Prefix The characters appended to the beginning of the folder name Suffix The characters appended to the end of the folder name Between Prefix and Suffix Select the identifier from this menu Choose from Use sequential number Use shoot ing date or Use shooting date amp time The options available depend on the iden tifier selected Between Prefix and Suffix Use sequential number v Use sequential number i Use shooting date Start numbering at 1 Use shooting date and time Use sequential number When you select Use sequential num ber identifiers will consist of numbers Start numbering at 1 assigned in ascending order You can Length of number f DA dots specify the starting number and number of digits Use shooting date Use shooting date amp time Select Use shooting date to use the date of transfer as the identifier Select er De eee Use shooting date amp time to use the date and time of transfer as the identi YYYYMM DD _ NN trailing number shown as NN above will be added only if it fier The date and time is of the form is necessary to make a unique fle name YYYY MM DD HH MM SS NN where TETAY YYYY denotes the year MM the month DD the day of the month HH the hour Year month day separator MM the minute SS the second and NN Hour minute second separator the serial number added if the selected YYYY MM DD HHMMSS
114. _ NN folder name already exists The charac r a cae ters that will separate the year month and day and hour minute and second can be entered in the Year month day separator and Hour minute second separator text boxes Use shooting date amp time 26 The File Naming Area You can choose how files will be named in the Hers File naming area of the File Destination and tsinatfiename Naming dialog O Change Original file name Select this option to save transferred images using the file names originally assigned by the camera when the pictures were taken Change Select this option to save the transferred files under an automatically generated file name File Naming When Change is selected in the File naming Ble Naming area clicking the Change button will display ee ee ee the File Naming dialog Suffix Original file name Other Tokydl File names consist of a prefix identifier suffix Between Prefix and Suffix Use sequential number _ and extension where the identifier is a unique fie number date or date and time depending on Pee any ene ore the option selected IN the Between Prefix and C Reset the starting number to 1 for each download Suffix menu Sample Nikon0001T okyo JPG Sample Mikon i T okyo J PG Prefix Identifier Suffix Extension Prefix Select Original file name to append the file name assigned by the camera to the begin ning of the tr
115. _0001 NEF 33 File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help or select Hand Tool from the View menu The mouse pointer will change to a hand To scroll the image drag the mouse in the direction you want to go You can also scroll the image using the scroll bars below and to the right of the image area e nsf gt Shooting Data LE nS ia i EA v B RAW 1 4 images selected 6 8MB 1600 x 1200 ees Editing Image Files You can open and edit the image displayed in the view area with the program specified in the Still Image i 108 and Movie tabs 884 109 of the Preferences dialog To open the im age in the specified program click the Edit button in the toolbar If Nikon Capture 4 Editor is selected as the editor for still images Nikon Capture 4 Editor will start 135 Edit button If you register a program using the Add Remove editing program dialog you can also edit the image with a program other than the one specified in the Preferences dialog To display the Add Remove editing program dialog click the drop down arrow next to the Edit tool button and select Add Remove editing program from the menu that appears For more information on the Add Remove editing program dialog see The Add Remove Editing Program Dialog A 69 127 Tagging Images To tag the current image click the Add Tag Mark button in the toolbar A tagged image attribute icon will appear in the status bar Tags
116. a b i 3 A w SS N Selected images are opened in image windows Photo Editing Program Following installation of Nikon Capture 4 the default photo editing program for Nikon Browser is Nikon Capture 4 Editor If you have changed the photo editing program return to the Nikon Browser Prefer ences dialog and select Nikon Capture 4 Editor 142 Using Drag and Drop Images can also be opened by dragging them into the application window Windows or image window Macintosh amp Nikon Capture Editor DER Tool Palette 1 File Edit View Settings Tools Help IM E Color Balance gt H curves d Wunsharp Mask Ed digital DEE gt Size Resolution gt Bird s Eye gt Information Tool Palette 2 IF Ej Advanced Raw gt El white Balance gt Wnoise Reduction gt Elimage Dust Off gt Ed vignette Control ODx Genera Lens Windows 800 Image Tool Palettel gt songo i IF E Color Balance BB unsharp Mask DX Digita DEE gt Size Resoluton Bird s Eye information _ Tool Palette2 Advanced RAW White Balance IP Noise Reduction IP E image Dust off gt Drop an image file here to open it DS Vignette Control BE Asheye Lens Macintosh 143 The Bird s Eye Palette The Bird s Eye palette shows the position of the portion of the image visible in the active image window To display or hide the Bird s Eye palette click the triangle in the Bird s Eye palette title bar
117. a will continue to take photographs until you click Stop Shooting in the Time Lapse Photography dialog 4 232 Specify the number of photographs to be taken Use the Shots box to choose a number of photographs from 2 to 9 999 This option is not available when Keep shooting until cancelled is selected Choose an interval setting The delay between shots can be set to any value between 00 00 01 one second and 99 59 59 ninety nine hours fifty nine minutes and fifty nine seconds Click Start Click Start To process images as they are taken check the Process images before saving Live Batch option in the Time Lapse Photography dialog and click Next The Live Batch dialog will be displayed adjust settings and click Start to begin time lapse photography Y Time Interval Settings If the delay is shorter than the time required to record each photograph the actual interval between photographs will be longer than that specified in the Time Lapse Photography dialog The Time Lapse Photography Dialog If you make a mistake in entering settings in the Time Lapse Photography dialog a warning will be dis played Return to the Time Lapse Photography dialog and adjust settings as directed Error Logs If an error occurs during shooting an error log will be displayed click OK to close the log and return to the Camera Control window The Minimize Button Windows Mac OS X Clicking the minimize button in the progress dialog minimizes Nikon Ca
118. age Mechanical Image Processing page selection Exposure Mode Exposure Mode Programmed Auto v ta bs i Shutter Speed A _ h 4sec Shutter Speed i hm 1 5 sec Aperture i gt FI3 5 Aperture FSS Exposure Comp 8 J oey Exposure Comp a gt o Ev Flash Comp lt gt OEV Flash Comp P 0EY Flexible Program 4 97 gt 0 Step s Flexible Program 8 J gt 0 Step s Simulated LCD_ mmz vaJ Ig P 1c P F d d D ad aaa ms ot et te aS Shoot buttons D100 Connection Status This area shows the following information about the camera currently connected e Camera name e Camera orientation D2H only l GO 8 Horizontal Rotated 90 Rotated 90 clockwise counterclockwise Note that if Off is selected for Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu the horizontal icon will be displayed regardless of camera orientation Hide Camera Control Click this button to hide the Camera Control panels during shooting Download Options Click this button to choose a destination and file name for pictures captured from the camera Enable controls on the camera body D2H only Check this option to enable the D2H camera controls allowing settings to be adjusted and photographs to be taken directly from the camera The camera power switch AF area mode selector and depth of field preview button can not be used when this option is checked all other controls function
119. age s dialog where you can choose a desti nation folder and file name and select Quality JPEG compression from Maximum High Medium or Low Each page is saved as a separate file 4 Creating a Photo CD Windows XP If the computer is equipped with a CD R or CD RW drive images selected in Nikon Browser can be copied to CD 1 Select images in the thumbnail list Drag the selected thumbnails over the CD R or CD RW drive icon in the folder tree and release the mouse button Nikon Browser C Documents and Settings User My Documents Wy Pictures img0002 BEA File Edit View Image Folder Tools Window Help ae Sea flaca Yollaici loleaics w Shooting Data Folders a ij ig B My Documents O My Albums O My eBooks My Music BH My Pictures O Img0001 9 Imgoo02z yg My Computer HM 31 Floppy 4 yg My Computer JA 3 Floppy 4 See Local Disk C PRSI eee N E 3 My Network Places 8 images 2 images selected Viewing the File List To list the files that will be copied to CD Click the CD R or CD RW drive icon once to select it and choose Display file list for CD writing een eee ee in the File menu or click the CD R drive icon with the right mouse a E button and select Display file list for CD writing in the menu that Edit using other programs appears Write to CD Display file list For CD writing Eject Proparties Rename a file or a Folder F2 Move Copy
120. age while leaving the maximum and minimum values untouched Lowering the gamma value has the same effect as moving the midpoint slider to the right lowering mid tone output values and darkening the image The default value for gamma is one which produces a linear curve in which input and output values are the same Gamma can be set to any value between 0 05 and 6 00 175 Sampling the Image for Midpoint The midpoint can also be set by direct sampling Regardless of the channel currently selected in the channel menu sampling simultaneously defines the midpoint for each of the red green and blue channels while leaving the midpoint for the master curve unchanged To sample the midpoint click the Midpoint button B When the cursor is moved over the active image it will take the shape of an eyedropper Move the cursor over the image to find the pixel that you want to use to set the midpoint keeping an eye on the pixel level display in the Information palette to identify pixels with a neutral input value look for pixels that you think should be a neutral gray color in the final image With the cursor over the target pixel click the mouse button The input value for the selected pixel will be used as the reference value for the midpoint The cursor will return to its original shape and the image will auto matically be altered to reflect the new value for midpoint Editing Curves Directly Fine adjustments can be made to brightness and contrast
121. ail Images displayed in the Image Area can be sent by e mail To send images click the E mail button in the tool bar or select E mail from the Tools menu E mail button For more information on sending images by e mail see Sending Messages by E Mail 8 86 in Nikon Browser Uploading Images Amercias Only You can upload the image displayed in the view area to the on line album at the Nikon Net site American residents only To upload the image click the Publish to Nikon Net or PDA button in the toolbar or select Publish to Nikon Net or PDA from the Tools menu This option is only available in the version of Nikon View released in the Americas Publish to Nikon Net or PDA button For more information on publishing to the Web see Uploading Images S84 89 in Nikon Browser If a Single Image Is Open In Windows if the currently displayed image is the only image opened all the image files in the same folder as the one displayed are played back as a slideshow 129 Displaying Shooting Data Shooting data photo information for the current image are displayed in the shooting data area You can expand or collapse the shooting data are by selecting View Shooting Data trom the View menu You can also expand or collapse the shooting data area by clicking the toggle button a small triangle in the upper left corner Toggle button Cpr Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode s
122. amed file These settings can later be recalled using the Load Camera Settings option Choosing Save Camera Settings displays a dialog where you can choose a desti nation and file name for current camera settings Camera settings are saved with Ww the extension ncc Save Camera Settings 242 The Camera Menu The commands in the Camera menu are used to adjust the following camera settings Custom Settings Selecting this option opens the Custom Settings dialog 4 246 where camera Custom Set tings can be adjusted Camera Date and Time Selecting this option opens the dialog shown at right where PEPP you can set the camera s clock calendar to the current date and time To view the current time and date settings click Use Date 10 01 2003 Current Date Time Click Set to set the clock calendar to the Time 14 18 time and date shown Edit Camera Curves This option is used to create a custom tone compensation curve and download it to the cam era where it applies when Custom is selected for the camera tone compensation option Edit Camera Curves i 1 00 60 Input 159 Output 69 The controls in the Edit Camera Curves window are identical to those in the Curves window except in the following respects 1 only the master channel not individual RGB channels may be edited 2 there is a limit of 20 spline points 3 the midpoint may not be edited 4 a user defi
123. ansferred file name Select Other to append characters of your choice to the beginning of the file name Suffix Select Original file name to append the file name assigned by the camera to the end of the transferred file name Select Other to add other characters to the end of the file name Between prefix and suffix Select the identifier from this menu as described under Sub Folder Naming opposite If Use sequential number is selected when Reset the starting number to 1 for each download is checked file numbering will be reset to the selected start number with each transfer Extensions Transferred files are automatically assigned an extension based on file type File type File type Photograph JPEG Movie TIF Photograph TIFF WAV Sound voice memo NEF Photograph RAW NDF Dust Off Ref Photo ZT The Image Transfer Rule Area The options selected in the Image transfer Image transfer rule rule area of the File Destination and Nam File Attribute Not specified ing dialog determine which pictures are transferred to the computer as Specify dates 10 01 2003 10 01 2003 File Attribute Choose the type of picture to be transferred Option Description Not specified Pictures of all types are transferred Marked for transfer Only pictures marked for transfer using camera transfer marking function are transferred Marked for protection Only protected pictures are t
124. apture CITING seriis taria a AE aiia aT aaa RE 140 Opening Mage Fles osrin ernan eE E EEEE EE EEEIEE EEEE S hea 141 The Bird s Eye PaletlE niaiserie iania Ene EN EATE EETA E AEEA EAR 144 Rotatino and IIS ONG WIGS assein annaa EAEEREN EEE OAE 145 The imormaton Pal CTC isivnassaacvauxswnasa auttaiaainsavavhwuinnatcunaniasnn said EE EEEE TNA EE aa 146 EEE a E A S A A EAA E AA A E E E 149 Image Adjustment Enhancing Images cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseseeeeeeaeaeaaaaas 150 I OTST A ANG A E T E E A E A A A A A A EET 153 PA UAV ea EE EEE E E A E EE E EEE E E dubemeantarecssh 159 E MAS O eana E E E EEA EEE E EAE E EE detains EEA 162 vone a e E aaar E A E E Benn E AE E ed 166 N E AAT EE E nea ENO E A RI EE AEAN A A E A AE A S 168 Eelde e E ET coer AE TAE I A IT E ATA E E N 178 WEE EE E IA AE E T E AE E A A EET 181 DUS Fe OIC U T menaa aa EE EEE E tie EE EEE O E 184 Ee OT AA I AAAA A I A A ATA E A A E OET 186 Fisheye Lens Fisheye to Rectilinear Image Transformation for Use with DX 10 5mm Fisheye Lenses 190 Output size and RESOIU TION cari ncreveuteoesmnnenantceunie ueanhiadicucia a aT a ENa E aia a ia 192 Saving and Loading Image Adjustment Settings ccccccccececcccecceeeseseeeeeseceeeeeeeeesssaaaeeeeeeeeeenees 195 S I a R ren E os E EA E AAEE A 196 ERE E E AE E E cata E N NE AE E AAAA ET 200 Bara EO UCP e EEEE TAE O EEE E E VENE EEEE A EEEE 201 Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon Capture
125. arge 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EV Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Folders My Documents 2 My Albums My eBooks My Music B My Pictures oz Imgoo02 Imgo003 New Folder My Received Fil D Pocket_PC My C B My Recent Documer w NetHood PrintHood SendTo E H Start Menu DSC_0004 NEF 6 0MB 2464 x 1632 Nikon Browser comes into play after you have transferred pictures to your computer hard disk using Nikon Transfer or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Use to organize pictures into folders e and select pictures for viewing in Nikon Viewer e or editing in Nikon Capture 4 Editor Nikon Capture 4 Editor Pi DSC_0001 NEF 25 The wore thee settings at the thre this image was taken 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 RAW 12 bit Lossless Image Soe Large 2464 x 1632 Lene 4 850 3 5 4 56 Tool Palette 2 H Ef advanced raw Use to enhance photographs taken with Nikon digital cameras System Requirements What You Need to Run Nikon Capture 4 Before installing Nikon Capture 4 make sure that your system satisfies the following require ments Windows Macintosh Pre installed versions of Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Professional Windows Millennium Edition Me Windows 98 Second Edition SE Mac OS 9 0 4 9 1 9 2 Mac OS X ver
126. art Nikon Browser C Upload all images to NikonNet Do nothing Set Camera Date and Time C Set the Camera Date and Time to your computer clock when you connect your camera Synchronize date and time now The Transfer Options dialog contains the following tabs Tab Description Y General Specify the actions that will be performed once transfer is complete Transfer Specify what actions will be performed during transfer Creator Choose the applications that will be associated with transferred pho 32 Macintosh version only tographs movies and sound files After changing transfer options click OK to save changes and return to the Nikon Transfer window Click Cancel to cancel any changes to settings and return to the Nikon Transfer window 29 The General Tab The General tab contains the following options P General Transfer Start Nikon Browser Action to perform after transfer Select this option to start Nikon Browser after PEE the image files are transferred Selecting this op E Upload al images to Nort tion enables the Upload all images to Nikon Oaai Net check box Set Camera Date and Time Upload all images to NikonNet North South O Set the Camera Date and Time to your computer clock when you connect your camera and Central America only Synchronize date and time now Check this box to upload all the transferred im age files to NikonNet a free on line photo album service available to custom
127. at top One line of thumbnails at side When both Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer are open clicking a thumbnail once in Nikon Browser will display the selected image in Nikon Viewer Viewing the Nikon Browser Toolbar and Navigation Area When Display one line of thumbnails at top or Display one line of thumbnails at side is se lected the selected item is checked and the toolbar and navigation area are hidden To view the toolbar and navigation area select the checked option to cancel the thumbnail only display 132 Deleting Image Files To delete the image file displayed in the view area select Delete from the File menu or press the Delete key New Folder Ctrl N View Edit Ctrl E Edit using other programs gt Rename a file or a folder F2 Move Copy Delete Del Delete Sound Page Setup Print Ctrl P Play Sound IPTC Information Ctrl J Tag marking gt Attribute gt Exit Alt F4 The deleted image file will be moved to the Recycle Bin Windows or the Trash Macintosh and the next image in the Nikon Browser thumbnail list area will be displayed in Nikon Viewer If the deleted image was the last image and there are no following files nothing will be displayed in the view area 7 Deleted Image Files Deleted image files are moved to the Recycle Bin Windows or the Trash Macintosh To cancel the deletion open the Recycle Bin or the Trash and return the deleted files back to their original location I
128. at would be created at current settings File size depends on the color model RGB or CMYK and in the case of RGB images on the pixel bit depth that will be used when the image Is saved Separate uncompressed file sizes are shown for CMYK and for eight bit and sixteen bit RGB 193 The Size Resolution Settings Menu Clicking the IEE button in the Size Resolution palette displays the Size Resolution Settings menu eal Size Resolution EE Copy to Clipboard Load Save nnnnnnnnlunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnan Keep the output size Reset to Dix 6 amp MP Width 10 03 Reset to 100 EON s Scale 50 0 bit RGB 4 30M6 CMYK S 74MB 16 bit RGB 8 61MB Copy to Clipboard Copy current Size Resolution settings to the clipboard Reset to D1X 6MP Reset to 100 Load Save Recent files Select this item to load size and resolution settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nsr will be displayed The settings in the Size Resolution palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save size and resolution settings to a named file These set tings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current size and res
129. ate or date and time click Change Use output resolution Check this option to print the image at its native resolution and dimensions In Nikon Cap ture 4 this is the size and resolution selected in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Size Resolution palette 4 192 If the image will not fit in the printable area see above at the current printer and paper size settings when you click the Print button to begin printing a message will be displayed warning that the image will be cropped to fit the printable area Choose a larger paper size or reduce the size of the image using the Size Resolution palette Use output resolution is not available when multiple images are selected 72 Page Layout Choose trom Select layout and Select picture size and adjust options as described be low Select layout When this option is selected you can choose the number of images that will be printed from a drop down menu Page orientation 1Up One image printed in center of page One image printed in center of page Two pictures printed 2 Up ee ee ee S Two pictures printed side by side 2x 2Up Four pictures printed in two rows of two Four pictures printed in two rows of two columns each columns each 2x AUp Eight pictures printed in four rows of two Eight pictures printed in two rows of four columns each columns each 4x AUp Sixteen pictures printed in four rows of Sixteen pictures printed in four rows of four columns each four columns each 5x 5Up Twen
130. ated with the camera Image Dust Off option extension ndt If it finds a reference tile in the same folder as the current image a message will be displayed Click Yes to use this file as a reference If the folder contains more than one reference file clicking Yes will display the dialog shown at right Select a file for use with Image Dust Off If the user clicks No or the current folder does not contain an image created with the camera Image Dust Off option a folder selection dialog will be displayed Select a folder containing Image Dust Off reference data Nikon Capture Editor YD Do you want to use a Dust OFf ref photo that is in the same folder as the active image Select Dust Off ref photo More than one suitable Dust Off ref photo was found Select the one you wish to use based on its shooting date and time The active image was shot at 10 1 2003 8 45 51 PM but the best match is not necessarily the one with the closest date and time 10 01 2003 12 49 23 AM 10 01 2003 12 49 23 4M Images Taken with Other Cameras If the image in the active window was not cre ated with the D2H a folder selection dialog will be displayed Select the folder containing the desired Image Dust Off reference photo and click OK Nikon Capture 4 Editor will display a message offering to search for reference file applies to the current image Click Yes to start the search if Nikon Capture 4 Editor finds a suitable file this will
131. ation dialog select a thumbnail in the thumbnail list and select IPTC Information from the File menu IPTC Information Caption Picnic Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 22 23 48 9 Exposure Mode Programmed Auto Keywords Recorded Keywords flower picnic Simple view Shooting data added to the image file during transfer are displayed in the lower part of the Caption area in the IPTC Information dialog Adding Shooting Data to Images Shooting data is added to the image file during transfer when Copy Shooting data Shutter speed etc to the IPTC caption field is checked in the Transfer tab of the Transfer options dialog xy 31 58 IPTC Information can be displayed in Simple or Detail views Click the Simple Detail button to toggle between Simple and Detail views IPTC Information Caption Picnic Caption Writer Nikon Headline Instructions Keywords v Recorded Keywords Add picnic flowers City State Province Country Chiyoda ku Tokyo Japan Categories Category Supplemental Categories Add x flowers Urgency None Credit Author Nikon Author s Pasiton Nikon Credit Nikon Source Copyright Notice Nikon
132. be displayed To close the Nikon Transfer window without transferring pictures Click the Hall button or click the close box Click the Halll button in the Nikon Transfer window or click the close box in the title bar at the top of the window amp Nikon Transfer Nikon File destination C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures File naming Original file name Image transfer rule All images Close button The Nikon Browser window will be displayed Closing the Nikon Transfer window starts Nikon Browser Windows or activates the Nikon Browser window Macintosh Quitting Nikon Transfer Macintosh The Macintosh version of Nikon View 6 you can quit Nikon Transfer from the program menus In Mac OS 9 select Quit from the File menu In Mac OS X select Quit Nikon View 6 from the application menu Nikon View 6 About Nikon View 6 Preferences K Transfer New Folder Close EW Edit E Edit using other program Services gt p Hide Nikon View 6 36H Hide Others wH Rename a file or a folder Move Copy Close Displayed Image Delete Be Delete Sound Quit Nikon View6 0 Mac OS X Page Setup Print Play Sound IPTC Information 3J Tag marking Attribute vy Mac OS 9 16 Disconnecting the Camera For information on disconnecting the camera see the Nikon Guide to Digital Photography or User s Manual provided wi
133. be used as a reference tor Image Dust Off If more than one suitable file is found the dialog shown at right will be displayed Select a reference file for Image Nikon Capture Editor YD Do you want the closest Dust Off ref photo match to be selected automatically Select Dust Off ref photo More than one suitable Dust Off ref photo was found Select the one you wish to use based on its shooting date and time The active image was shot at 10 1 2003 8 45 51 PM but the best match is not necessarily the one with the closest date and time 10 01 2003 12 49 23 AM 10 01 2003 12 49 23 AM Select Dust Off ref photo Dust Off Clicking No will display a list of all Dust Off ret photos Select the file that will be used as a The possible Dust Off ref photos along with their shooting dates and times are listed below Select the one you want to use The thumbnail at the bottom should be featureless and gray IF areal image is selected it will not be suitable for Image Dust OFF The active image was shot at 10 1 2003 8 45 51 PM but the best match is not necessarily the one with the closest date and time reference for processing the current image 10 01 2003 12 49 23 AM DSC_0001 NEF 10 01 2003 12 49 23 4M DSC_0002 NEF Y Excessive Dust If a large amount of dust is detected in the current image Nikon Capture 4 Editor will display a warning stating that the results of Image Dust Off can not be guaranteed Click Yes to proceed No
134. ch files with hidden attribute 0 images selected The Folder Tree To view the folder tree after displaying the search control click the Folders button in the toolbar or select Show folder tree in the View gt Navigation menu 56 The following search criteria are supported By file name Find images with the specified characters in their file names Wildcard characters or 2 can be used By scene mode Find images taken at the selected scene mode setting Note that not all cameras support scene mode to determine whether a picture was taken in scene mode view the shooting data By date Find images created or modified in the specified date range Folder s to be searched Find images in the specified location Additional settings The following additional criteria can be used to narrow or widen the search Additional settings ns ae Search inside of all sub folders Search inside of all sub folders Search all sub folders under the selected location Search only files with tag mark o r Search only files with tag mark on Search files with hidden attribute Contine search to tagged files Search only files with hidden attribute Windows only Confine search to hidden files 57 Viewing File Information In Nikon Browser you can use the IPTC Information dialog to view the file information added to an image file during transfer Displaying the IPTC Information Dialog To open the IPTC Inform
135. cle Bin Windows or the Trash Macintosh To cancel dele tion open the Recycle Bin or the Trash and return the deleted files to their original location In Win dows if you delete image files from a memory card inserted in the camera card slot or card reader or from a network folder the image files are permanently erased and cannot be recovered 60 Browser Window Operations Displaying Images When you select a thumbnail in the thumbnail list area still images are displayed in Nikon Viewer while movie files are played back in the program selected in the Movie Tab of the Preferences dialog 84 109 Viewing Still Images To view a still image double click its thumbnail in the thumbnail list area Nikon Viewer will open with the image displayed NEF and RAW images will display taster if the Nikon NEF Preview Creator has been used to create large previews S84 64 Toolbar Y Nikon Viewer DSC_0001 NEF 25 File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help aD aAa ana m OOmMmM O VY QAhynu Y Shooting Data Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Syne Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EY Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Commen
136. d and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options Hide Camera Controls Download Options Enable controls on the camera body Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing a TTN Focus Area 4 P E ice Focus Area 4 L1 k w i Metering Mode Metering Mode Spot Flash Sync Mode Flash Sync Mode Sensitivity 150 200 ee Cl Auto Sensitivity I50 200 v C Auto white Balance aad a White Balance v Ez 25 F 35 is ue mot i Controls displayed when D2H is Controls displayed when D100 is connected connected Focus Area The focus area can be selected using the arrow buttons D1 series and D100 cameras offer a choice of five focus areas the D2H eleven In group dynamic AF area mode D2H only the selected focus area group is displayed the groupings used are determined by the option se lected for Custom Setting a3 Group dynamic AF See the camera manual for details For information on AF area mode and focus mode see The Mechanical Tab 4 239 Metering Mode Unless Enable controls on the camera body is checked the metering mode can be se lected from this menu D2H only Metering mode defaults to the option selected with the camera metering selector If Enable controls on the camera body is checked or a D1 series or D100 camera is con
137. d by the camera Image transfer rule Choose the type of pictures to be transferred At default settings all pictures will be transferred 20 Choose image transfer options By default the folder containing the transferred images will automatically be displayed in Nikon Browser when transter is complete Nikon View allows you to display images in a different application choose an image database application for cataloging images as they are transferred and adjust transfer settings Changes to these transfer options are made in the Transfer Options dialog To display the Transfer Options dialog click the Transfer Options button in the Nikon Transfer window before transfer For more infor mation see Transfer Options SH 29 amp Nikon Transfer Nikon Transfer Options button 3 Add file information By default information on camera settings at the time the image was created is in cluded with each image transferred to your computer If desired you can specify additional information to be included with all transferred images To do so select Add additional information IPTC field to all files in the Transfer tab of the Transfer Options dialog see Step 2 and then click the Add additional information IPTC field to images button in the Nikon Transfer dialog For more information see IPTC Information A 33 amp Nikon Transfer Nikon Add additional information IPTC field to images button Files with t
138. ders for images transferred from memory Transfer cards using Nikon Transfer or captured using Destination Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Choosing a folder from the list selects it in the folder tree area i dia View the pictures currently selected in hel L cmd o md 0 thumbnail list Open the pictures currently selected in the S ie he Ctrl E J thumbnail list in the application selected for ve cmd E nae Ctrl M M a Add Tag Mark Mark Tag selected images selected images dai 53 EE a e Remove tags from selected images e 53 D l ari Ctrl R D Rotation Rotate all still images in the current selection 54 5 cmd R Print all still images in the current selection C 71 cmd P View the images in the current selection in an 2 82 automated slideshow Append the selected images to an e mail mes ag M4 E evar Bapene the selected images to an e mail mes Upload all images in the current selection to the Publish to Web residents of the USA only or a Pocket PC NikonNet or jor Palm hand held device This button is only PDA available in the version of Nikon View released in the Americas aera Adjust the display size of thumbnails 50 i l Ctrl K Display the Nikon View 6 Preferences dialog G F1 Windows keyboard shortcuts are listed first Macintosh shortcuts second 37 Starting Nikon Browser Nikon Browser can be started from the Start menu Windows or by double clicking the Nikon View a
139. deshow Properties E 3 1 te z aj i al A 1 Fies Play movies to end Play sound for all movies C Display file info C Enable margin between arid cells You can show or hide the Slideshow Properties dialog by pressing the TAB key When a Single Thumbnail is Selected If only one thumbnail is selected in the thumbnail list the slideshow will include all images in the cur rent folder Slideshow Slideshow technology licensed from View Multimedia Ltd 2002 82 The Slideshow Options Dialog The Files Tab Displays a list of file names and in Windows SlideRMPEnnEbes file paths of the image files that are currently aj 1 3 4 displayed in the slideshow ejaj ful o oss Files Options 88 OSC_OO01 NEF i Image tif g mage tif The Options Tab This tab controls how slides are displayed Slideshow Properties Play movies to end ih z 13 4 Check this option to play movies to the end be A 4 il gt aj x fore showing the next slide If this option is not checked the next slide will be shown after the Options specified interval whether or not the movie has finished Play movies to end Play sound for all movies Display file info movie files included in the slideshow Enable margin between grid cells Grid style Play sound for all movies Check this option to play back sound with all the Display file Info Check this option to display the file locat
140. ding to the dimensions input in the Size Resolution palette This height width aspect ratio will be maintained when you adjust the size of the crop in the active window and scale will be adjusted to reflect changes to the size of the crop scale can not be increased beyond 200 If the image can not be output at the current resolution using the new dimensions resolution will automati cally be adjusted to an appropriate value This option is useful when you want to set the output dimensions and file size of the final image before selecting a crop Width Height The output dimensions for the current crop can be entered in these text pixels inches boxes The units used to describe output dimensions can be chosen from the menu to the right of the text boxes at The at text box is where you enter the output resolution This text box is not active if the unit chosen for output size is pixels when resolution is fixed at 300ppi The value chosen at other settings should reflect the resolution of the output device on which the final image is to be printed The units for resolution can be selected from the resolution menu which offers a choice of pixels per inch ppi or pixels per centi meter ppcm The default resolution is 300 ppi EJ Scale File Size Scale output size as a percentage of input size maximum 200 is displayed at the bottom of the Size Resolution palette together with the uncompressed file size of the image th
141. e A visual tool for editing tones enhancing brightness and contrast in a selected portion of the tone range Changing the shape of the tone curve changes the mapping between input the tones in the original image and output tones as they appear after editing The digital equivalent of a densitometric curve See also Tone Unsharp Mask A filter for increasing the apparent sharpness of bit mapped images Sometimes abbreviated as USM Unsharp masks emphasize the differences in color and brightness between edges outlines and the rest of the image See also Halo width Threshold USB Universal Serial Bus A standard for computer serial interfaces which allows automatic plug and play recognition of peripheral devices and hot plug connection of peripherals while the computer or device is on Depending on the type of interface installed on the computer USB will operate at high speed USB 2 0 only with data transfer rates of up to 480 Mbps or Tull soeed USB 1 1 USB 2 0 with data transfer rates of up to 12 Mbps For more informa tion consult the manufacturer 278 White balance The human eye is able to adapt to changes in lighting and consequently to humans a white object will still look white whether viewed in direct sunlight or under overcast skies or in doors under incandescent or fluorescent lighting A digital camera in contrast must adjust colors according to lighting if colors that appear white when viewed d
142. e Of the two the Curves palette offers the more precise control The Color Balance palette is useful when for example you want to adjust brightness or color balance for all pixels in the image The Curves palette in contrast allows adjustments to be made to specific portions of the tone range making it possible to enhance the image while preserving detail Curves an Overview To view the Curves palette select the tool palette containing the Curves palette from the View menu the default location for the Curves palette is Tool Palette 1 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette To enable the tools in the Curves palette turn the Apply button on FA Apply button RGB T f Current channel Histogram button Auto Contrast button White Point button Curve edit display Midpoint button l Black Point button _ Reset Active Curve o Reset All Curves Input 151 Output 151 INSIST The main editing tool in the Curves palette is the curve edit display which contains a curve showing the relationship between input the tones in the original image and output how the tones in the input will be represented in the final image Separate curves control the relationship between input and output for the image as a whole the master curve and for each of the red green and blue color components or channels The default curve in each case Is linear meaning that tones wil
143. e of NEF is that while user settings such as curves and color balance are saved they are not applied to the original image data NEF images may thus be edited and saved several times without degrading or altering the original image NEF files however require a relatively large amount of storage space See also RAW image 2 6 Noise Data in an image file that are not a part of the original image the digital equivalent of film grain The presence of noise is reflected in a loss in image quality Noise appears primarily in dark areas of the image and can be reduced by adjusting exposure or lighting to Till in shadows ppcm pixels per centimeter a measure of resolution The more pixels per centimeter the higher the resolution See a so ppi Resolution ppi pixels per inch a measure of resolution The more pixels per inch the higher the resolution See also ppcm Resolution Preferences Settings controlling basic operations performed by a given program adjustable by the user Profile A file defining the color characteristics of an input device such as a scanner or digital camera an output device such as a printer or monitor or the color space used for editing images Profiles are used by color management systems to ensure consistent color reproduction The Nikon Color Management System used in Nikon Capture employs ICC profiles See also Color space ICC RAW image A photograph taken at an image quality setting of HI RAW Ra
144. e 4 s batch option can be used to process multiple images automatically Workflow 1 Field Photography This workflow is for users of D1 series D100 D2H or COOLPIX cameras taking photographs in the field away trom their computers Step 1 Transfer pictures Nikon Transfer 13 e Select type of pictures to be transferred amp 28 e Select destination 24 Memory card Card reader or PC card slot v Step 2 View pictures Nikon Viewer 119 lt Nikon Browser 35 e View pictures e Select pictures R 124 51 v Step 3 Edit pictures Nikon Capture 4 Editor amp 135 e Modify pictures amp 150 e Save modified pictures 4 196 e Print pictures i 200 Vv Step 4 Use pictures _ Nikon Browser 35 e Print selected pictures 71 e Send pictures by e mail 0 86 e Upload pictures to web 89 Workflow 2 Studio Photography This workflow is for users of D1 series D100 or D2H cameras who want to capture photo graphs directly to their computer as they are taken Step 1 Connect the camera e If Nikon Transfer starts click Close to exit D1 series D100 or D2H camera Computer v Step 2 Start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 215 v Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 215 e Adjust settings in Camera e Take pictures di Control 4 233 rect
145. e Browse button The selected profile will appear in the adjacent text box If this option is not checked the default RGB color space will be used Intent If you have chosen to use a printer profile the type of matching to be performed can be selected from Relative and Perceptual Depending on the profile changing the match ing method may produce no change in output This option is not supported with some profiles consult the manufacturer for details Relative Colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile will be printed using the closest colors available Other colors are not affected Perceptual If the image contains colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile all colors in the image will be compressed to fit the gamut CMYK separation profile Lists the profile used to convert RGB images to CMYK when saving images in CMYK TIFF tormat To choose a different profile click the Browse button Multiple Displays Windows In a multiple display environment choose a single profile suited to all displays Y Supported Color Profiles Nikon Capture 4 supports only ICC International Color Consortium monitor and CMYK profiles Par ticular care should be exercised when choosing a CMYK profile as the profile supplied by the manu facturer of your output device may not be an ICC profile The Color Management Tab Changes to settings in the Color Management tab also apply to Nikon Browser Nikon Viewer and Niko
146. e Copy current image adjustment settings to the E i 195 Adjustments clipboard Paste the contents of the clipboard to image en Ctrl V B hancement settings in the active window cmd V Zoom in on the image in the active window See Ctrl 125 Using Nikon Viewer cmd Zoom out from the image in the active window Ctrl as ene a 125 See Using Nikon Viewer cmd 90 degrees CCW Rotate the image in active window ninety degrees Ctrl Shift R 145 counter clockwise shift cmd R ea 90 degrees CW Rotate the image in active window ninety degrees Ctrl R 145 ais clockwise cmd R raan Use this tool to select the portion of the image in the active window that will be saved Zooni Cursor Use to zoom the image in the active window in and 7 7 126 out See Using Nikon Viewer Use to view portions of the image not currently Hand Cursor visible in the active window See Using Nikon Viewer eno tren Launch Nikon Browser r Browser Show Nikon Capture Camera Launch Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Control Open the Batch dialog where you can select a folder of images for batch processing Open with Open the image in the active window in Photo a Photoshop shop S Show Original Hide the effects of changes to image adjustment Image Data settings When this button is clicked a question mark ap pears next to the mouse pointer Clicking on a win Help Windows only dow menu or button while the question ma
147. e Settings menu Image Adjustments gt White Balance gt Advanced RAW vignette Control gt Noise Reduction gt Copy to Clipboard Color Balance gt Load Unsharp Mask gt Saven Size Resolution gt Reset to Neutral PT gt b Image Dust OFf Digital DEE Fisheye Lens 177 Color Balance The Color Balance palette offers simple controls for adjusting overall brightness contrast and color balance for the entire image Unlike the controls in the Curves palette however the Color Balance palette does not allow you to make changes that affect only a portion of the tone range After making broad adjustments to color balance in the Color Balance palette examine the histogram in the Curves palette and make fine adjustments as needed Adjusting Brightness Contrast and Color Balance Display the Color Balance palette Select the tool palette containing the Color Balance palette from the View menu the default location for the Color Balance palette is Tool Palette 1 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply button bd g Color Balance Brightness Contrast Red Green Blue x turn it on A 2 If the Apply button is off Opening NEF Files Saved in Nikon Capture 3 or Earlier In Nikon Capture 4 changes to color balance apply before changes to curves In earlier versions of Nikon Capture changes to curves applied before changes to color balance with the result
148. e Unsharp Mask palette Unsharp mask RAW only be applied at the last step after all other adjustments RGB TIFE nave been made YCbCr TIFF Reduce the noise common to pictures taken with digital RAW Image Dust Off 162 Vignette Control 166 Color Balance 178 Unsharp Mask 181 FINE cameras Nikon Capture supports color noise reduction and Noise Reduction 184 NORMAL edge noise reduction BASIC Increase detail in shadows or highlights Digital DEE 186 Process pictures taken with an AF DX 10 5mm f2 8G fisheye Nikkor lens to reduce distortion at the edges of the frame making them look like images taken with a wide angle lens Adjust the size and resolution of the image for output on a particular device Fisheye Lens 190 Size Resolution 192 152 White Balance The tools in the White Balance palette are used to adjust white balance for RAW images Using these tools not only can you correct white balance when the setting chosen with the camera failed to produce the desired effect you can also deliberately alter white balance to introduce a cold or warm cast into the image Users of the D2H can copy white balance set tings to the camera or memory card 4 156 White balance can be adjusted by specifying the desired color temperature or by sampling the image for the gray point Specifying a Color Temperature Display the White Balance palette Select the tool palette containing the White Balance palette trom the
149. e a choice of banks A or B when the D1x D1H or D2H is connected banks A B C or D can be selected Click OK After making any changes to Custom Settings click OK to save changes in the camera Custom Settings bank and exit the Custom Settings dialog Custom Settings for the D1 series and D100 cameras are described on pages 248 251 Cus tom Settings for the D2H on pages 252 258 Depending on the model of camera connected some Custom Settings may not be available Custom Settings Custom Settings can not be saved to a separate file Clicking the Reset button resets all Custom Settings to their default values Settings That Can Not Be Adjusted from the Custom Settings Window The Custom Settings listed below can not be adjusted in the Custom Settings window e Mirror lock up for CCD cleaning D1 series Custom Setting 8 Cleaning mirror up D100 setup menu can only be adjusted from the camera e RAW NEF image save D1 series Custom Setting 28 if this option is set to 0 off when Nikon Capture is started a message will be displayed Clicking OK in this dialog sets Custom Setting 28 to 1 uncompressed RAW image save enabled Custom Setting 28 can only be returned to 0 from the camera e ISO Auto D100 Custom Setting 3 ISO Boost D1 series Custom Setting 31 can be adjusted from the Exposure 2 tab of the Camera Control window e PC Shooting Mode D1 series Custom Setting 30 this option is adjusted from the Mechan
150. e following program Nikon Capture Editor Photo Editing Program Use the default photo editing program selected by your Operating System Select this option to edit images in the default image editing program for your operating system Use the following program Select this option to edit images in the image editing program of your choice To choose a program click Change and select the program from the Select Program dialog Select program to edit still images Select program r Select a program to edit still images Nikon Capture Camera Con A From Nikon Capture 4 i CN i Nikon Capture Editor Cancel T Nikon Capture 4 gt License Agreement 4 Nikon Editor i Nikon Scan 4 Nikon Capture Control E Nikon Scan Application Nikon View 6 gt C Nikon Capture Editor A Outlook Express Readme Yf Paint A PictureViewer Application ey F pmk3 exe E QuickT ime Player Application amp QuickTime Updater ath System Configuration Utility ER Sustem Infnrmatinn s Add to Favorites Cancel Choose Kind Application Go to Windows Macintosh The name of the selected application is displayed under Use the following program Use the following program Nikon Capture Editor 108 The Movie Tab The Movie tab is used to select the applications used to view and edit movies Preferences
151. e or Continu ous Changes to this setting also apply to Custom Setting 30 Unless Enable controls on the camera body is checked in the connection status area the shooting mode for D2H cam eras can be selected from Single Continuous High Speed Continuous and Self Timer If Continuous or High Speed Continuous is selected the AF and Shoot and Shoot but tons will instead be labeled AF and Start and Start If Enable controls on the camera body is checked or a D100 camera is connected the current shooting mode will be shown but changes can only be made using camera controls See the camera manual for details Maximum Shots D2H only Use the arrows to choose the maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous low speed or continuous high speed modes or enter a value directly in the text box Choose any value between 1 and 40 the value chosen should not however exceed the capacity of the camera memory buffer as shown at the right edge of the LCD display Values larger than the capacity of the camera memory buffer will be shown in red This setting only applies when the camera is connected and differs from the number of shots selected with Custom Setting d2 AF Area Mode Choose the AF area mode If Enable controls on the camera body is checked D2H only the current AF area mode will be shown but changes can only be made using camera con trols See the camera manual for details Focus Mode The current focus mode
152. e saved with the Ww extension set Select this option to restore the default settings selected for User default im age adjustments in the General tab of the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences dialog ey 207 In the case of the default settings file Neutral set RAW images taken with the D1x will be scaled to 100 4 016 x 2 616 pixels Recent image adjustment settings files up to four are listed at the end of the settings menu Selecting a file from the list restores the saved settings 195 Saving Images Nikon Capture supports a variety of file formats Images displayed in Nikon Capture can be saved in a file format that suits the end in view Hints for choosing a file format may be found on the pages that follow Choosing a File Type Nikon Capture 4 supports the following file types when saving images Filetype NEF Uncompressed NEF Nikon Electronic Image Format Compressed l 16 bit TIFF RGB 8 bit TIFF RGB Uncompressed TIF TIFF CMYK JPEG Compressed JPG Nikon Electronic Image Format NEF All images including those taken at an image quality setting of RAW can be saved in Nikon Electronic Image Format NEF NEF images created in Nikon Capture 4 can only be opened in Nikon View 6 or Nikon Capture 4 or in Adobe Photoshop 5 0 or later Photoshop LE ex cluded using the Nikon NEF filter supplied with Nikon View 6 Photographs recorded at an image quality setting of uncompressed NEF RAW can be comp
153. e selected application e g Adobe Photoshop 7 0 will be displayed This op tion can not be selected if the chosen file format is NEF If this check box is on the image will automatically be opened in the selected application after being saved to disk 199 Printing Images Images can be printed directly from Nikon Capture 4 Editor to test the effects of image ad justments For more information on printing images see Nikon Browser Printing Images 71 Open the image Be sure the image you wish to print is open in Nikon Capture 4 Editor Choose a print setup Choose Print Setup from the File menu to display the page setup dialog for your printer and operating system Adjust settings as desired and click OK Print the image Selecting Print from the File menu displays the Print Layout dialog where you can select the layout and the number of copies to be printed Click Print to begin printing Print layout Printer Epson Stylus Photo 2000P ESC P Paper Letter 8 1 2x11 inch P Printable area 8 27 10 31 inch V Print previews H 44 Page be Copies Page Setup 1 Meta Data C Use output resolution Page layout Select layout 1Up O Select picture size C Rotate image s to fit g Print a picture multiple times Times C Borderless print o Use thumbnail data Draft use only Print Setup Printer Name Epson Stylus Photo 2000P ESC P v Status Ready Type
154. e selected pixel will be added to the list of 190 watch points in the Information palette ss Point2 l Point number SI Gi i Delete button eto Point 4 R UISA G B H 0 1 162 Avg 146 Getting to Know Nikon Capture 4 Editor The pixels currently being monitored in the Information palette are shown by a o icon in the image window Each point is identified by a number corresponding to the point number listed in the Information palette You can monitor up to four pixels at a time A icon Point number Moving a Watch Point To move the watch point to a new pixel drag the lt icon in the image window Deleting a Watch Point To remove a pixel from the list of watch points click the lt button next to the corresponding listing in the Information palette or drag the icon out of the image window The re maining points will be renumbered to reflect the change RGB and Average Values A warning button will be displayed in the information palette at zoom ratios of less than 100 Click ing this button will display a dialog stating that accurate RGB and average values can not obtained at the current zoom ratio click Yes to view the image full size EJ Preferences Advanced Color Clicking the icon at the right end of the Information palette tool bar displays a menu from which you can access the Advanced Color tab of the Preferences dialog xy 210 147 Lost Highlights and Shadows Areas of t
155. e top left corner of the palette v Size Resolution Keep the output size Width 10 03 oe 5 Scale 100 0 bikt RGB 17 2MB CMYK 22 9MB 16 bit RGB 34 4MB RAW Image Size D1x Only The D1x is designed to record images at 3 008 x 1 960 pixels six megapixels Image quality will not necessarily increase when RAW images are output at a size of 4 016 x 2 616 pixels ten megapixels equivalent to the dimensions of the CCD NEF Images When an image is saved in NEF format the entire image will be saved together with information on resolution and the size and dimensions of the current crop 192 Make changes to options as described below Keep the crop When Keep the crop is selected you can use the mouse to adjust the size and posi tion of the current crop as desired If you enter a new value for height or width in the Size Resolution palette the remaining dimension changes automatically to maintain a constant height width aspect ratio and scale is adjusted to reflect the new dimensions scale can not be increased beyond 200 If the image can not be output at the cur rent resolution using the new dimensions resolution will automatically be adjusted to an appropriate value This option is useful when you want to specify height and width after selecting a crop Keep the output size Keep the output size locks output dimensions and file size at their current values set ting the aspect ratio of the current crop accor
156. ead of an embedded profile when opening files is checked this RGB color space profile will be used for all images If it is not checked the profile embedded in each image will be used Multiple Displays Windows In a multiple display environment choose a single profile suited to all displays The Color Management Tab Changes to settings in the Color Management tab also apply to Nikon Viewer Nikon Capture 4 Editor and Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Default Display Profile The default Windows display profile is NKMonitor_win icm This profile is equivalent to sRGB 112 Printer profile Specifies the printer profile to be used when printing images Use profile for printing If this option is checked you can choose a profile for printing by clicking the Browse button The selected profile will appear in the adjacent text box If this option is not checked the default RGB color space will be used Intent If you have chosen to use a printer profile the type of matching to be performed can be selected from Relative and Perceptual Depending on the profile changing the match ing method may produce no change in output This option is not supported with some profiles consult the manufacturer for details Relative Colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile will be printed using the closest colors available Other colors are not affected Perceptual If the image contains colors not in the gamut of the selected
157. eady connected a camera check the connection IF you connect a camera while this e window is open Image Transfer will not be used Click OK to close the warning and display the following window Preferences can be ad justed using the options in the menu bar For information on connecting the camera see the Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Image Settings Tools Help No camera was detected Note that Image Transfer will not launch automatically while this window is open Show Camera Controls Download Options Download Options button Click this button to choose a destination for photographs captured from the camera Before Starting Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control D2H D100 Cameras Users of D2H and D100 cameras will need to ensure that the appropriate setting is chosen for USB op tion in the camera setup menu before connecting the camera to a computer running Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Choose a USB setting according to your computer s operating system Operating system D2H D100 Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Choose PTP Choose Mass Storage or PTP Windows 2000 Windows Me Windows 98 SE Choose PTP Choose Mass Storage Choose PTP Choose PTP Windows XP Home Edition Professional Windows 2000 Professional Mac OS X Installing uninstalling and using Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control under a multi user operating system requires Administrator privileges
158. ection to other COOLPIX series cameras not supported e CD ROM drive required for installation Other e Internet connection required for upload to the Web e mail program required when sending pictures by e mail With CarbonLib version 1 6 or later t The camera may not function as expected when connected to an IEEE 1394 hub A list of boards and cards that have been tested and approved for use with the D1 D1x and D1h is available on line 2 The camera may not function as expected when connected to a USB hub or keyboard tt Camera firmware version 2 00 or later Installation For information on installing Nikon Capture 4 see the Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide Windows XP Home Edition Professional Windows 2000 Professional Mac OS X Installing and using Nikon Capture 4 under a multi user operating system requires Administrator privi leges When using Nikon Capture 4 log in as Windows XP Home Edition Professional Computer administrator Windows 2000 Professional Administrators Mac OS 9 0 If you are using Mac OS 9 0 use the Software Update control panel to update to the latest version of CarbonLib before beginning installation 7 Workflow Using Nikon Capture 4 How you will use Nikon Capture s various components depends on whether you are taking photographs in the field or in a studio with a D1 D1x D1H D100 or D2H connected to a computer Regardless of where you take your photographs Nikon Captur
159. ector f2 Do nothing Multi Selector Function F3 Info horizontal PB vertical FUNC Button f4 FY Lock Command Dial F5 _ Reverse Command Dial Direction C Exchange Functions for Front and Rear Command Dials Change Aperture setting via Sub Command Dial C Enable Command Dial on Playback and Menu Mode C Sticky buttons and dials f6 Disable Shutter Button if no CF Card is present f7 Item Custom Setting Center Button Center Button on Shooting Center Button on Playback Zoom Ratio Multi Selector a e Multi Selector function FUNC Button fm Command Dial Reverse Command Dial Direction Exchange functions for Front and Rear Command Dials Change Aperture setting via Sub Command Dial Enable Command Dial on Playback and Menu Mode Sticky buttons and dials a f6 f1 f2 S f4 f5 f6 Disable Shutter Button if no CF Card is present 258 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control To view the Preferences dialog for Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control select Options from the Tools menu Windows or select Preferences from the application menu Mac OS X or Edit menu Mac OS 9 Tools Show Nikon Capture Editor Nikon Capture Control About Nikon Capture Camera Control Preferences 3K Aaien Can t Undo Show Nikon view Options Ctrl K Services Preferences Windows Mac OS 9 Mac OS X The Pr
160. ed allowing you to take a closer look at specific parts of the image This chapter is divided into the following sections The Nikon Viewer Window This section outlines the controls and displays in the Nikon Viewer window and describes how to start and exit Nikon Viewer Using Nikon Viewer This section details how Nikon Viewer can be used to view images Nikon Viewer Preferences Read this section for an overview of the Nikon Viewer Pref erences dialog Details can be found in Nikon Browser Preferences A amp 103 119 The Nikon Viewer Window The Nikon Viewer Window Getting to Know Nikon Viewer The main parts of the Nikon Viewer window are identified below Menu bar Contains menu commands for the various operations that can be performed in Nikon Viewer Title Bar Lists the name of the current image and the zoom ratio at which it is displayed Toolbar Contains buttons for per Shooting data area forming various opera Displays photo information tions see opposite for current image A 130 File Edit view Folder Tools Window Help amp D a m f E A OELG Shooting Data 0 DE Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attach
161. ed Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EV Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment RAW F 1 4 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 1200 Status bar Lists such information as the View area number of pictures currently The image is displayed in this area open in Nikon Viewer the posi tion of the current image among them and the file size and attri butes of the current image Menu Commands and Tool Buttons Although many operations can be performed using both menu commands and the buttons in the tool bar the explanations in this manual give priority to operations performed using tool buttons 120 e za T FA Pe attinnmn tnVwRrmiar N Vara A rT Ar The names and functions of the buttons in the Nikon Viewer window are shown in the fol lowing table Function If the current image is not the first or only image currently opened in Nikon Viewer clicking this but ton will display the previous image If the current image is not the last or only image cur rently opened in Nikon Viewer clicking this button will display the next image Previous Image Selected Next Image Selected cmd Ctrl Display at the Ctrl a Original Size Displays the image at a zoom ratio of 1 1 mips The cursor takes the shape of a magnifying glass Ctrl 9 Zoom Tool allowing you to zoom the current image in or out cmd 9 using the mouse Hand Tool The cursor takes the shape of a hand allowi
162. ed file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save dis Save plays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current white balance settings Advanced Raw settings are saved with the extension mar Selecting this item restores the settings in effect at the time the photograph Reset to Neutral l was taken In the case of the D1 image sharpening will be set to None Recent Advanced RAW settings files up to four are listed at the end of the Recent files settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Advance RAW palette to the saved settings The Settings Menu The Advanced RAW Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Ad ea vanced RAW from the Settings menu Image Adjustments gt White Balance b Copy to Clipboard vignette Control gt Load Noise Reduction Save Curves Reset to Neutral i5 b b Color Balance Unsharp Mask Size Resolution 161 Image Adjustment Image Dust Off Image Dust Off compares RAW photographs with a reference image created with the same camera to reduce the effects of any dust that may be present on the low pass filter protect ing the camera s imaging sensor Before Image Dust Off After Image Dust Off Image Dust Off Image Dust Off only affects relatively featureless areas of the image Display the Image Dust Off palette Select the tool palette containing the Image Dust Of
163. eduction palette 152 184 185 Nikon Browser 4 5 8 11 35 117 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Con trol 4 5 8 11 215 261 Nikon Capture 4 Editor 4 5 8 11 135 214 Nikon NEF Preview Creator 64 65 Nikon Transfer 4 5 8 11 13 34 Starting 15 Nikon Viewer 4 5 8 11 119 134 NTSC 1953 264 271 O Open 141 143 Original image 137 Output size 73 192 194 P Photo CD 75 77 Photo information 55 130 136 Pixel color of 146 Preferences Nikon Browser 103 117 Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 259 261 Nikon Capture 4 Editor 206 214 Nikon Viewer 134 Printer profile 113 115 212 214 Printer resolution 277 Printing images 71 74 128 200 Profiles 112 116 211 214 264 266 277 Q Quick Tools 136 137 R RAW 141 152 238 277 See also NEF Resolution 192 194 277 RGB 277 color space profile 112 116 211 214 264 266 default RGB profile 112 114 212 213 Rotating images 54 145 S Saving images 196 199 Scale 193 277 Sensitivity 164 236 Settings saving and loading 158 161 165 167 177 180 183 185 189 191 194 195 Size Resolution palette 152 192 194 Shadows 148 169 Sharpening 159 242 See also unsharp mask Shoot button 233 234 Shooting data See photo infor mation SRGB 112 160 211 264 271 Status bar 36 124 Subdivisions 211 System requirements 6 T Temporary files 104 209 261 Threshold 182 188 278 Thumbnail 278 folder 41 48 li
164. ee is charged for this service Self Timer Mode D100 Cameras Only When the shooting mode dial on the D100 is set to self timer mode the Mechanical tab will show a shooting mode of Single and any photographs taken with the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control shoot buttons will be taken in single frame mode with no shutter release delay To take pictures in self timer mode use the shutter release button on the camera Continuous Mode D2H Cameras Only When the D2H is connected the amount of memory remaining in the camera memory buffer is dis played at the right edge of the simulated LCD panel This information is updated at regular intervals but temporary discrepancies may exist between the display and the actual amount of memory remaining in the buffer Taking Photographs in Continuous Mode When a D100 is connected or a D1 series camera is in PC mode continuous shooting can only be per formed using the camera shutter release button The shoot buttons in the camera control window can only be used to take one photograph at a time 240 Non CPU Lenses The following restrictions apply to Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control when a non CPU lens is mounted on the camera the operations listed can still be performed using the controls on the camera body see the camera manual for details Lens data Lens data D1 series specified not specified Can be selected from Can not be adjusted Aperture priority Mode selected with auto and Manual came
165. eferences dialog contains the following three tabs Tab Description Choose the length of time the camera remains active when no operations General 260 are performed E Temporary Files Specify the location of the folders used for temporary storage 261 color Management ie the color profiles used by the Nikon Color Management System 561 After making changes to preferences click OK to save changes and return to the Nikon Cap ture 4 Camera Control window Click Cancel to cancel any changes to settings and return to the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window Viewing Preferences To view settings in any of the three panels click the appropriate tab 259 The General Tab The General tab contains the following items While Nikon Capture Camera Control is running keep camera awake Set the length of time before exposure meters turn off automatically when the camera is running on battery power This setting only takes effect when the camera is connected and powered on and only when Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control is running This setting takes precedence over the auto meter off option cho sen using camera Custom Settings The D100 and D2H will stay awake indefinitely regardless of the setting chosen here for 15 minutes D1 series only The time before exposure meters turn oft automatically is set to fifteen minutes Always General Temporary Files Color Management While Nikon Captu
166. efore Copying Files If the computer is equipped with multiple CD R or CD RW drives only one can be used for creating CDs To enable the write option for a selected drive open the Properties dialog to the Write panel and select Enable CD write The drive used for temporary storage during the write operation must have sufficient free space to store the temporary files The drive used for temporary storage can be selected in the Write panel of the Properties dialog for the CD R or CD RW drive Make sure that the CD R or CD RW disk used has enough free space to store the selected files 77 Creating a Photo CD or DVD Mac OS X 10 2 3 or Later If the computer is equipped with a CD R W or DVD R W drive images selected in Nikon Browser can be copied to a CD or DVD 1 Select images in the thumbnail list Drag the selected thumbnails over the Disc Burner Folder icon in the folder tree and release the mouse button The selected files will be copied to the Disc Burner folder Nikon Browser Disc burn folder Vv VT VT VV gt v The name assigned to the Disc Burner folder will be copied to the volume label for the new CD or DVD To choose a new name for the Disc Burner folder select it and choose Rename a file or folder from the File menu With the Disc Burner folder selected choose Burn Disc trom the File menu The Burn Disc dialog will be dis Transfer played New
167. ention AN 101 NEF RAW and TIFF Images NEF RAW and TIFF images will be converted to JPEG for export to HTML albums SRGB If Convert image s to sRGB color space is selected in the Color Management tab of the Nikon Browser Preferences dialog lt gt 112 114 images will be converted to the sRGB color space as they are exported to HTML albums 6 264 99 6 Click Next The following dialog will be displayed Export HTML 3 3 Destination Settings Specify the destination folders Destination folder C Documents and Settings U seri y Documents My Pictures Nikon View HTML Create a new subfolder Sample htmi0001 Open your web browser after creation Choose a destination for the HTML album Destination folder The current destination is displayed here To choose a new destination click Browse and navigate to the desired location Create a new subfolder Choose this option to save each album in a separate sub folder Sub folders are assigned names consisting of a prefix and a folder number assigned automatically by Nikon View a sample is displayed under the Create a new sub folder check box To choose a new prefix or change the number of digits in the folder number click Change The Folder naming dialog will be displayed choose a naming rule using the following options Folder name Enter a prefix Folder naming Numbering digit Folder Name html Choose the number of di
168. er DSC_0001 NEF 25 File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help 0 e e808 SURE VO BDB Me ShootingData Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EV Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment RAW F 1 4 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 1200 Other Ways of Starting Nikon Viewer e Double clicking selected thumbnails in Nikon Browser e Selecting images in Nikon Browser and pressing the Enter Windows or return Macintosh key Supported File Formats Nikon Viewer can be used to view files created with supported cameras and images previously saved using Nikon View 6 Editor or Nikon Capture version 4 or earlier For information on the file formats sup ported see Opening Image Files in Nikon Capture 4 Editor The Editor Window lS 141 Dust Off Ref Photos Dust Off reference photos xy 62 can not be displayed in Nikon Viewer 122 Exiting Nikon Viewer To exit Nikon Viewer open the File menu and select Exit Windows or Quit Mac OS 9 In Mac OS X select Quit Nikon View 6 from the application menu Close Edit Edit using other programs Delete Delete Sound Ctrl W Ctrl E
169. era card reader or PC card slot Choose the type of pictures to be transferred and Open the File Destination and change file destination and naming 24 Naming dialog X5 24 Choose image transfer options 29 Open the Transfer Options dialog x 29 Add file information 33 Open the IPTC Information dialog xy 33 Transfer pictures 22 File destination CAD ocuments and Settings User My Documents My Pictures 1 Choose the type of picture to be trans ferred the destination and naming rules Before transferring pictures click Change to Image arster nde AVinages choose the type of picture to be transferred the File destination and naming area folder in which pictures will be stored and how transferred files will be named 24 File naming Original file name File destination This text box lists the current destination for transferred pictures The default folder at installation is Windows My Documents My Pictures If the My Documents folder does not contain a My Pictures folder pictures will be transferred to My Documents Mac OS 9 Documents Mac OSX Pictures File naming You can choose either to transfer pictures to the computer using the file names originally assigned by the camera Original file name or to assign pictures a new automatically generated name as they are transferred Automatically generated name By default pictures will keep the file name originally assigne
170. erring images to a hand held device see the notes on these pages Additional information on the options available in the Module Selection dialog is provided in The Module Selection Dialog 92 Choose upload options The Upload Preview dialog will be displayed After adding information to the image files or resizing the images click OK to continue For more information see The Upload Preview Dialog A 94 NikonNet Publishing Preview Caption Sunflower Keywords picnic Description DCS_0001 NEF Common options for all images Image Size Keep the original size x C Don t show this dialog again Images will not be enlarged Low Quality High Smal File Size L ge C Use IPTC Information RAW NEF and TIFF lmages RAW NEF and TIFF images are converted to JPEG before upload 90 If the Module Selection dialog was not displayed in Step 3 the NikonNet User Information dialog will appear prompting you to enter your NikonNet user name and password NikonNet User Information User Name Nikon1019 Password Mn C this dialog again Remember Password Choose an album In the Choose Album dialog select the album to add the images to or create a new album For more information see The Choose Album Dialog S96 Choose Album Current Albums Skyscraper Create New Album C Don t show this dialog aga
171. ers resident in the United States of America S84 89 This option is not available outside the Americas Do nothing Select this option if you want Nikon View 6 to do nothing after the transfer of the image files is complete On a Macintosh the thumbnail display in Nikon Browser will not be updated when the images are transferred to your computer Set Camera Date and Time Check Set the Camera Date and Time to your computer clock when you connect your camera to set the synchronize the camera clock with the computer at the start of each transfer session If the camera is connected when the Transfer Options dialog is displayed the clock can be synchronized by clicking the Synchronize date and time now button Set Camera Date and Time This option is available only with cameras that support IEEE 1394 D1 series cameras or PTP More information may be available from the web sites listed on page 2 of this manual Before synchronizing the camera clock be sure that the computer is set to the correct date and time 30 The Transfer Tab This tab allows you to adjust settings for the images about to be transferred Note that there are some differences between the Windows and Macintosh versions of this tab Transfer options Transfer Options General Transfer General Transfer Creator Delete original files after transfer is completed Note It was deleted of Images marked for protection V Copy all images marked as
172. es CMYK Default Generic CMYK Profile Open ColorSync Device Profiles M Use profile for monitor 4 Change Display Profile _ Use profile for printing Printer Intent Perceptual Color Space Conversion m Convert image s to sRGB color space when they are e mailed uploaded to NikonNet PDA or converted HTML JPEG format ae ColorSync Default Profiles for Documents The default color space profiles are displayed in this area Clicking the Open ColorSync button opens the ColorSync dialog to a panel where you can choose the default profiles for the RGB and CMYK color spaces RGB Default Lists the output ICC color space profile used when working with RGB images If Use RGB Default instead of an embedded profile when opening files is checked this RGB color space profile will be used for all images If it is not checked the profile embedded in each image will be used CMYK Default Lists the profile used to convert RGB images to CMYK when saving Images in CMYK TIFF format Open ColorSync Opens the ColorSync control panel OS 9 or System Preferences OS X where you can choose the color profiles used 114 Device Profiles Lists the default color space profiles for monitors and printers Change Display Profile If the Change Display Profile button appears next to this item you can click the but ton to open the Monitor co
173. es the camera may not recognize the file containing the new value for white balance Reading White Balance from the Memory Card For information on reading white balance value from the memory card see the Guide to Digital Pho tography with the D2H Comments In addition to letters and numbers comments can contain quotes apostrophes spaces and any of the following characters U MM uUum aa id a sH agr op R aC ot ate e A nye UE 4 a tt ie stil ad W West oe P and 4 n 157 The White Balance Settings Menu Clicking the IE icon in the White Balance palette displays the White Balance Settings menu v B White Balance Copy to Clipboard Set Color Temperature Load SAVE Camera WB Auta Reset to Recorded Value Use Gray Point Write settings to camera Advanced Color Options a _ Adjustment 4 d k Cooler Warmer Mew WB Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current white balance settings to the clipboard Select this item to restore white balance to settings saved using the Save op tion A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive volume Load and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nwb will be displayed The settings in the White Balance palette will in stantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save current white balance settings to a named file These settings can
174. es and return to the Nikon Browser window Click Cancel to cancel any changes to settings and return to the Nikon Browser window Viewing Preferences To view settings in any of the panels click the appropriate tab Preferences Tab Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA a Auto launch Thumbnails Still image Movie Sound f Preferences The General Tab Macintosh Only The General tab is used to select a volume disk for temporary storage Preferences Auto launch Thumbnails Stillimage Movie Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Virtual Memory Disk Note Making changes to items on this page will also affect Nikon Capture and Nikon Editor Macintosh HD H4 Virtual Memory Disk Choose the volume used for storage of temporary data including image cache data from the pull down menu The default volume for temporary storage is the start up disk The General Tab Changes to settings in the General tab also apply to Nikon Capture 4 Editor and Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Nikon View 6 must be restarted before changes to settings will take effect 104 The Auto Launch Tab The options in the Auto Launch tab control whether Nikon Transfer will launch automatically Preferences a Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Auto launch Thumbnails Stillimage Movie Sound Setting Nikon Transfer Auto launch when co
175. es will not be rotated or flipped regardless of whether flips or rotations have been applied to the image in the active image window If batch processing is performed on images that have been flipped or rotated in Nikon Browser these changes in orientation will be preserved when the image is saved Existing Image Adjustment Settings If the Apply settings already in NEF files option is not checked any changes to settings stored with files saved in NEF format will be ignored and the settings in the selected settings file applied If you have processed a series of NEF images separately and want to save them all as sixteen bit TIFF you can check this option and use batch processing to save all the images to a single folder in sixteen bit TIFF format 203 Choose a destination for the processed images In the Destination section choose options for saving the processed images Use source folder When this option is selected processed images will be saved to the same folder as the original Use source file name When this option is selected processed images will be saved under the same name and in the same location as the original images although the file extension will change if the chosen file format differs from the original Save to This text box shows the folder to which the images will be saved after processing To choose a new folder click the Browse button to the right of the text box and navigate to the desired location This o
176. est Subject Priority v Show Focus Area when Manually Focusing Show Focus 4rea when using a Continuous Shooting mode Dynamic AF Mode in Continuous Servo AF 10 Selected AF Area Priority Focus Area Illumination OFF Delay 0 2 second v E Steps for Exposure Control 2 1 3 EY Step v Focus 4rea Selection a6 Wrap around disabled v ISO Step Value 20 1 3 EV Step v Vertical AF Button a7 AF ON Focus area vj Center weighted metering area 14 8 mm diameter v D1 series D100 cameras D2H illustration shows settings for D1x The Custom Settings dialog shows the Custom Settings currently in effect Changes to Custom Settings Changes made to settings in the Custom Settings dialog are stored in the camera not on the computer hard disk This means that changing settings in the Custom Settings dialog has the same effect as changing Custom Settings using camera controls 246 Choose a Custom Settings bank Choose a Custom Settings bank Custom Settings set from the pop up menu at the top right corner or the Custom Settings dialog Custom Settings Bank 4 Bank B Bank C Bank D Page 1 page 2 Page 3 Exposure Bracketing Bracketing order 3 Metered gt Under gt Over Vv The banks available depend on the model of camera currently connected When the D1 or D100 is connected you hav
177. ettings in the Details dialog to their original values click Reset to Defaults A confirmation dialog will be displayed click Yes to reset all settings to default values 102 Nikon Browser Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon Browser To display the Nikon Browser Preferences dialog select Preferences from the Edit menu Windows Mac OS 9 or the application menu Mac OS X You can also display the Prefer ences dialog box by clicking the Preferences tool button Ahant Miban View A Preferences K Select All Chrl 4 Select Images Services p Windows Mac OS 9 E Mac OS xX The Preferences dialog contains the following tabs Description D aL Macintosh only Choose the volume used for temporary storage a Choose whether Nikon Transfer starts automatically when a Auto Launch 105 memory card from a supported camera is detected Thumbnails Choose whether to create thumbnails from the original image 106 data Stilhimage Choose the applications that will be used to play back or edit 108 still images Choose the applications that will be used to play back or edt 109 movies Sound Choose the application that will be used to play back voice 111 Windows only memos Colon Wianacement Select the color profiles used by the Nikon Color Management 112 114 System CMS Publish to NikonNet or PDA f ad Americas ank Options for uploading images After making changes to preferences click OK to save chang
178. ew Creator The Nikon NEF Preview Creator can only be used with RAW NEF files 64 Click Start The following dialog will be displayed during processing To interrupt processing and return to the dialog shown in Step 1 click Settings Large Preview Generator for NEF file Number of NEF file s found 1 Number of NEF file s processed 0 Number of NEF file s not processed 0 Processing C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures DSC_0002 NEF BHEBRE Cancel Exit the Nikon NEF Preview Creator A log will be displayed when processing is complete Click OK to exit the Nikon NEF Preview Creator Processing started Wednesday October 01 20033 28 49 PM Found 1 of 1 file s to be processed 1 file s successfully processed Processing finished 11 42 01 AM Camera Playback The large previews created with the Nikon NEF Preview Creator replace the thumbnails embedded in the images when they were taken The resulting images can no longer be viewed on the camera 65 Playing Movies Back COOLPIX Cameras To play back a movie double click its thumbnail in the thumbnail list The application spec ified in the Movie tab 4 109 of the Preferences dialog will launch and play the movie back DSCNO414 MOY we File Edit Movie BTV Window Help Installing QuickTime In Windows you cannot use Windows Media Player to play back movies recorded with COOLPIX series digital cameras If a movie player program
179. ew Folder VIEW Edit Ctrl E Edit using other programs gt Delete Del Delete Sound Rename File or Folder Page Setup Print Ctrl P Play Sound IPTC Information Attribute b Exit Alt F4 Tagged image icon Dsc 0001 NEF Tagged images can be selected by choosing Image with tag marked in the Edit gt Select Images sub menu or by selecting Search only files with tag mark on in the search control 53 Rotating Thumbnails In the thumbnail list area you can rotate selected thumbnails The rotation applied to a thumbnail is also reflected in the associated image file Use the Rotate Image s dialog to rotate thumbnails To display the Rotate Image s dialog click the Rotate button in the toolbar or select Rotate from the Image menu Rotate Image s DSC_0001 NEF Apply to all 12 In the Rotate Image s dialog click CCW 90 to rotate the thumbnail 90 degrees counter clockwise or CW 90 to rotate 90 degrees clockwise Click the same button twice if you want to rotate the thumbnail 180 degrees You can check the results in the preview area When One Thumbnail Is Selected Click Apply to rotate both the thumbnail and the associated image file and then close the dialog When Multiple Thumbnails Are Selected Click Apply to rotate both the thumbnail and the associated image file and then display the next thumbnail To display the next thumbnail without rotating the current thumbna
180. f actual thumbnails If generic file icons are displayed click the check box to create thumbnails Cache On If this option is checked thumbnails that have already been displayed in Nikon Browser will be re created from the cache data decreasing the amount of time needed to display thumb nails Cache folder Windows only The cache folder field specifies the location to which cache files will be saved To change the location click Change Maximum cache size slider Use the slider to set the maximum size of the cache file The maximum size can be set in the range of 10 MB to 100MB at 10 MB intervals If you reduce the maximum cache size the current cache data will be deleted Windows only Delete Click this button to delete all cached thumbnails thumbnails will not be deleted until Nikon Browser restarts The original images associated with the thumbnails will not be affected Cache Settings Changes to cache settings will not take effect until Nikon Browser is restarted 107 The Still Image Tab The Still image is used to choose the default program for editing still images The specified program will launch when you select Edit trom the File menu in Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer Preferences Color Management p Publish to NikonNet or PDA Auto launch I Thumbnails Still image Movie Sound Photo Editing Program Use the default photo editing program selected by your Operating System Use th
181. f color management were turned off Use this setting if other applications in your workflow do not support color management Locate the monitor profile The monitor profile that appeared in Step 2 will be stored in the folder listed below e Windows System Color Choose the profile as the Nikon Capture 4 monitor profile Choose the profile noted in Step 2 as the Nikon Capture 4 monitor profile For details see Preferences The Color Management Tab 4 211 213 If you are unable to locate a profile with the correct name create a new profile as directed in Creating a New Monitor Profile 84 267 269 Step 2 Adjusting Settings in Adobe Photoshop The following describes the minimum necessary adjustments to ensure consistent color re production in Adobe Photoshop 7 0 The menus and dialogs referred to below are all from Adobe Photoshop Opening TIFF and JPEG Images Created Using Nikon Capture 4 Images saved in TIFF JPEG JFIF and JPEG Exif formats include color space profile informa tion Open files in these formats as described below Display the Color Settings dialog Select Color Settings from the Adobe Photoshop Edit menu Undo Step Forward BZ Step Backward X Z Fade gt F Cut 38X Copy 3C Copy Merged C Paste 3V Paste Into OEV Clear Fill Stroke Free Transform 3T Transform gt Define Brush Define Pattern Define Custom Shape
182. f palette trom the View menu the default location for the Image Dust Off palette is Tool Palette 2 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply button i i Image Dust OFF E Settings menu Dust OFF ref photo was taken at lt None gt Turn the Apply button on A Turn the Apply button on f to enable Image Dust Off Click Change Click Change to select a reference image for Image Dust Off Image Dust Off will be performed when the image is selected The date of creation of the selected Tile will be displayed under Image Dust Off reference image was taken at in the Image Dust Oft tool palette Image Dust Off Image Dust Off can be performed on RAW images only If the image in the active window is JPEG or TIFF the Apply button in the Image Dust Off palette will be grayed out and inactive Cameras That Support Image Dust Off The following cameras support Image Dust Off D1x D1H firmware version 1 10 or later D100 and D2H Image Dust Off is not supported with COOLPIX cameras D1 cameras or with earlier versions of the camera firmware for the D1x and D1 Reference Images The position and amount of dust on the low pass filter may change If possible take reference images regularly and use a reference image taken within one day of the selected photograph 162 Images Taken with the D2H If the current image was created with the D2H Nikon Capture 4 Editor will search for reference tiles cre
183. f you are using a D1 series camera choose PC as the operating mode If you are using a D100 camera turn the function dial to P S A or M Users of the D2H can select any mode other than M up mirror up Close Nikon Transfer If Nikon Transfer starts click the Close button Start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Double click the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control icon in the folder to which you installed Nikon Capture 4 The Camera Control window will be displayed 6 9 Nikon Capture Camera Control The D2H is connected s Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options v Enable controls on the camera body Exposure Mode Programmed Auto s Shutter Speed _ CO ee Aperture 3 5 Exposure Comp 4 a P oev Flash Comp Q 0 EV Flexible Program 4 nn 0 Step s 45 obs AF and Shoot Shoot Product Key If prompted to supply a product key when starting Nikon Capture 4 Editor or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control enter the product key for Nikon Capture 4 Other Ways of Starting Camera Control Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control can be started by double clicking the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Con trol icon in the folder to which you installed Nikon Capture 4 Mac OS 9 If Nikon Capture 4 was registered in the Dock during installation Mac OS X
184. ferent folder in the Windows version of the program click the Browse button and navigate to the desired location In the Ma cintosh version a new volume can be chosen trom the pop up menu The Temporary Files Tab General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management Note Changes made to items on this page will be reflected in Nikon Capture Camera Control and Nikon view Folder For temporary data C Documents and Settings User Local Settings Temp Changes to settings in the Temporary Files tab also apply to Nikon Browser Nikon Viewer and Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Nikon Capture 4 must be restarted before changes to settings will take effect 209 The Advanced Color Tab The Advanced Color tab contains the fol lowing items General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management Black Auto Contrast clip By default the black point is set to a value that excludes 0 5 of the darkest pixels in the crop This produces an optimal dy namic range with minimal loss of detail in slack Dropper vate RO 0 ef Shadows To preserve detail at the expense White Dropper value R 255 255 e g of dynamic range choose a lower value Dropper sample size Point Sample choose O to set the black point to the dark est pixel in the crop To increase dynamic range at the expense of detail choose a higher value White Auto Contrast clip By default the white
185. fy the monitor profile tor Adobe Photoshop first and then select the same profile for Nikon Capture 4 For more information see Choosing a Monitor Profile 84 267 Macintosh users will not need to perform this step The next step is to save the image from Nikon Capture 4 using a format that supports in clusion of color profile information If you save the image in TIFF JPEG JFIF or JPEG Exif information about the color profile used in Nikon Capture 4 will be embedded in the file and Adobe Photoshop will use this information to process colors appropriately when the file is opened For more information see Adjusting Settings in Adobe Photoshop 4 270 Step 1 Choosing a Monitor Profile Choose a monitor profile as described below Creating a New Monitor Profile If you have not yet calibrated your monitor use Adobe Gamma to create a profile for your monitor Adobe Gamma is included in the standard install of Adobe Photoshop Start Adobe Gamma Select Adobe Gamma from the system control panels or double click the Adobe Gamma utility icon ColorSync Macintosh The explanation in this section assumes that ColorSync version 3 0 or later is installed on your Macin tosh 267 2 Create a color profile Follow the on screen directions to calibrate your monitor The resulting monitor profile will be saved in the folder listed below Make a note of the file name e Windows System Color Choose the profile created in Ste
186. g applied the exact effect de pends on other Unsharp Mask settings such as halo width See a so Halo width Unsharp Mask Thumbnail A small preview image the digital equivalent of a photographic film contact sheet Images loaded into Nikon Capture are displayed in a thumbnail list in the Thumbnails section of the Camera Image window TIFF Tagged Image File Format an image file format for color or grayscale images suited to stor ing bit mapped images such as digital photographs In some implementations TIFF supports lossless LZW and packbit compression in lossless compression methods no information is lost when the image is compressed as opposed to lossy compression methods such as JPEG in which detail is sacrificed to achieve higher compression ratios Images saved in TIFF format using Nikon Capture are not compressed See also Compression JPEG Tone Pixel brightness measured either as the combined intensity for red green and blue or the intensity of each of these colors channels individually The number of tones that can be expressed depends on the bit depth of the image Nikon Capture 4 supports 256 tone levels per channel at a bit depth of eight bits and 4096 tone levels per channel at a bit depth of twelve bits data with a bit depth of twelve bits are handled internally as sixteen bit data The distribution of tones in the image can be seen in the Curves window histogram See also Bit depth Tone curv
187. ges If it is not checked the profile embedded in each image will be used CMYK Default Lists the profile used to convert RGB images to CMYK when saving Images in CMYK TIFF format Open ColorSync Opens the ColorSync control panel OS 9 or System Preferences OS X where you can choose the color profiles used 213 Device Profiles Lists the default color space profiles for monitors and printers Change Display Profile If the Change Display Profile button appears next to this item you can click the but ton to open the Monitor control panel Mac OS 9 or the Displays section of the System Preferences dialog Mac OS X Click the Color button Mac OS 9 or open the Color panel Mac OS X to choose a display profile Use profile for printing If this option is checked the profile listed in the Printer text box will be used when print ing images Note that CMYK profiles can not be used in Nikon Capture 4 if a CMYK profile is selected the status of the Use profile for printing check box can not be changed It Use profile for printing is not selected images will be printed using the default RGB profile Intent If you have chosen to use a printer profile the type of matching to be performed can be selected trom Relative and Perceptual Depending on the profile changing the match ing method may produce no change in output This option is not supported with some profiles consult the manufacturer for details Relative
188. gits in the folder Numbering digit ici number using the slider ai E b 4dgts Sample html0001 Open your web browser after creation Select this option to display the album in the default web browser after creation ISO 9660 Level 1 File Name Compatibility The maximum length for ISO 9660 level 1 file names is eight characters If Change file name for com patibility with IS09660 level 1 is selected in the File Name tab of the Details dialog xy 102 the prefix and folder number will be truncated to a maximum length of four characters each 100 Q Click Start to create the album The Details Dialog Clicking the Details button in Step 5 displays the Details dialog The Details dialog has three tabs Still images Movies and File Name After adjusting settings as described below click OK to return to the Export HTML dialog The Still Images Tab The Still Images tab is used to specify the size and quality of the enlarged image Stil mages Movies Fie Namel displayed when a thumbnail is clicked in Set image size the HTML album note that if the album FES v Small Large is viewed in a web browser that does not support display of JPEG images the file 4 Q gt Scale to fit 640 x 480 pixels name will be displayed instead Select Compression Ratio Include sounds to include voice memos Loe a Hh j 4 J gt Good Balance in the album Sma
189. he Preferences dialog Dust Off Reference Photos Thumbnails with an NDF extension are Dust Off reference photos created for use with the Image Dust Off option in Nikon Capture 4 Editor xy 162 They can not be displayed in Nikon Viewer Ds OO01 NDF 62 Window Menu Options in Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer The options in the Window menu can be Vi i ni d al used to organize the display in Nikon Brows peed er and Nikon Viewer PIET Cascade Vertical Arrange Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer in Display one line of thumbnails at top FS overlapping windows Display one line of thumbnails at side F9 Horizontal Arrange Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer one above the other in non overlapping win dows Vertical Arrange Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer side by side in non overlapping windows Display one line of thumbnails at top The Nikon Browser window is adjusted to display a single horizontal line of thumbnails above the Nikon Viewer window Display one line of thumbnails at side The Nikon Browser window is adjusted to display a single vertical line of thumbnails to the left of the Nikon Viewer window Nikon Browser C Documents and SettingsWser My Documents My Pictures lmg0002 DER nik EJER Y Nikon viewer DSC_0001 NEF 33 File it File Vie Fan Sp on Mia ae Not Attached Nose Redaction OFF Image Comment Y Nikon Viewer DSC_0001 NEF it Focal Le mm White Balance Auto Colo
190. he default location for the Fisheye Lens palette is Tool Palette 2 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply button x FR ie Settings menu AF OX Fisheye 10 Srmnm 2 86 Include areas where there is no image data Include areas where there is no image data check box Fill colar Flack Fill color menu 2 Turn the Apply button on A Turn the Apply button on f to enable the Fisheye Lens The image in the active win dow will be trimmed around a vertical area in the center of the image that has been processed to compensate for fisheye distortion and the Include areas where there is no image data check box will be enabled Ei risheye Lens Fill colar Flack Adjust settings Include areas where there is no image data Check this option to trim the image in the active area around a horizontal area in the center of the image that has been processed to compensate for fisheye distortion and fill areas where there are no image data with the color selected in the Fill color menu Include areas where there Image created with Apply button on is no image data selected Sada fisheye lens vertical compensation horizontal compensation 25 5 25 DER aia HUETE f i i MANETTE g fifi jji T F aE a Ji Te ar aa i 1 rih mE T T fee amp it 1 Areas without image data filled in white light gray dark gray black red green blue cyan magenta or yel
191. he Same Name If you attempt to transfer pictures with the same names as files already present in the destination folder the new files will be renamed by adding numbers sequentially before the period that separates the file name and the extension 21 Transfer image files Click the Transfer button to start transfer at the selected settings File naming Original file name Image transfer rule Al images Transfer button A progress dialog is displayed during transfer showing a thumbnail preview of the file currently being transferred Thumbnails will not be displayed if the Show thumbnail box is not checked Transferring Transferring DSC _0003 NEF 100 Transferred 2 8 images Show thumbnail During Transfer You cannot perform any other operation in Nikon Capture 4 while the progress dialog is displayed Auto Image Rotation D2H Only If On the default setting is selected for Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu tall por trait orientation photographs taken with the D2H in the vertical shooting position will automatically be rotated as they are transferred Select Off to record all images in landscape orientation regardless of how the camera is held COOLPIX Cameras with a Transfer Button If your camera is equipped with a transfer button you can use this button to transfer pictures to your computer See the documentation provided with your camera for details Transfer Marking CO
192. he image in which details in the high end or low ends of the tone range may have been lost lost highlights or shadows can be identified by locating pixels with the maxi mum or minimum value for one or more channel This information can be used when using color balance 178 or adjusting the white point or black point to capture the optimal amount of detail without sacrificing contrast 171 Show Lost Highlights When Show Lost Highlights is selected in Highlights displayed in image the Image menu lost highlights pixels window title bar l with a value of 255 for one or more channel P DSC_0001 NEF 25 Highlights are shown in color see table below Other Ee sn pixels are shown in black G B Shown in R Not ost Lost Not lost Not lost Lost Lost Not lost Not lost Not lost Lost Not lost Not lost Not lost Lost Show Lost Shadows When Show Lost Shadows is selected in Shadows displayed in image the Image menu lost shadows pixels dow nee Pe with a value of O for one or more channel WEZUEEASZ Paiste gt Shooting Data are shown in color see table below Other pixels are shown in white R G B Shown in Lost Not Tost Lost Not lost Lost Green Not lost Lost Lost Not lost Not lost Not lost Lost Not lost
193. his option to skip the Upload Preview dialog the next time you upload images To display the dialog again click Clear in the Publish to NikonNet or PDA tab of the Prefer ences dialog 4 117 Image Rotation Macintosh only Rotate the current image clockwise or counterclockwise Common options for all images Image size Images will be uploaded to the on line album at the size specified Images smaller than the specified size will not be resized Quality This slider controls how much the images will be compressed Five settings are avail able the lower the compression ratio the better the quality and the larger the file size Note that if Keep the original size is selected when files are uploaded the ex isting compression ratios of any JPEG images in the selection will not be changed if e The Convert image s to sRGB color space check box in the Color Manage ment panel of the Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer Preferences dialog is off or e No ICC profile is embedded in the image or the picture was recorded in the sRGB color space i e the picture was taken with a COOLPIX camera or with a D1x D1y or D100 camera in color mode or Ill which are optimized for the sRGB color space Use IPTC Information Select this option to copy the object name keywords and caption from the IPTC information for all files to the title keyword and comment fields respectively 95 96 The Choose Album Dialog In the Choose Album dial
194. humbnail list and select Copy and Resize as JPEG file s option in the Tools menu The following dialog will be displayed Copy and Resize as JPEG file Create JPEG file s from selected imagefs Image size Keep the original size gt New JPEG image s will be the same size as the originals Destination folder E nts and Settings User My Documents My Picture C Rename file s Quality settings Quality Low High 4 7 b Good Balance Small Large File Size Image size Choose a size for the new JPEG copies from the following options Keep the original size The JPEG copies will be the same size as the originals Fit to the new fixed frame size Choose a size using the slider Options range from Small 160x120 pixels to Large 1600 x 1200 pixels Apply a fixed reduction ratio to all images Copies will be reduced by the specified amount Choose from options ranging from Small 5 to Large 1 4 using the slider 80 Destination folder The current destination for JPEG copies is displayed in this text box To choose a new loca tion click Browse and navigate to the desired drive and folder Rename file s Select this option to save the copies Rename file s under new names assigned automati cally according to user specified rules Click Change to display the Rename file s dialog where a naming rule can be chosen A 43 Choose method Add suffix to the o
195. ialog depends on the printer in use The changes made are reflected in the Printer Meta Data To choose the information to be included with each print click Meta Data The Meta data print setup dialog will be dis played adjust the following settings and click OK to return to the Print layout dialog Depth level Put a check in the box next to the level of information you want included with your prints Choose from e Basic file name and date and time of recording e Additional information camera model shutter speed aperture f number im age size exposure mode and white bal Paper and Printable area fields Meta data print setup Depth level Basic Filename Capture date C Additional information Camera name Shutter speed F number Size Exposure mode White balance C Detail information Metering mode Exposure comp Focal length AF mode Sensitivity Font Arial Regular Auto Imprint capture date over image C Date only Font Arial Regular Auto ance e Detail information metering mode exposure compensation focal length autofocus mode and sensitivity ISO equivalency To change the font used to print shooting information click Change Sample Imprint capture date over image Select Date only to print the date of recording on the image or Date and Time to print the date and time of recording To choose the font used to print the d
196. iation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters 153 Adjust white balance using the options in the White Balance palette Camera WB Shows the white balance setting in effect at the time the photograph was taken and the amount of fine tuning performed New WB The white balance setting to be applied to the captured image can be chosen from the options listed in the table below When Daylight Standard Fluorescent or High Color Rendering Fluorescent is selected white balance can be fine tuned by selecting an option from the sub menu Sub menu Color Option option temperature Description White balance is set to the value chosen in the Use Gray Point gray point selection dialog xy 155 Recorded o o White balance is set to the value recorded when Value the picture was taken Calculate White balance is adjusted automatically based Automatically on the white balance of the original image Suited to photos taken under incandescent Incandescent 3 000K arene lighting Direct sunlight 5 200K Suited to photos taken in direct sunlight Cloudy 6 000K Suited to photos taken under overcast skies Daylight Ted x AET Shade 8 000K Suited to photos taken in the shade on sunny days Warm White 3 000K Standard 3700K 3 700K l o l l l Fluorescent Cool White Suited to fluorescent lighting including light 4100K 4 100K ing with a noticeable color cast The type of High Color bulb can
197. ical tab of the Camera Control window e Tone Compensation D1 series Custom Setting 24 Color Mode D1x D1H Custom Setting 32 Hue Adjustment D1x D1H Custom Setting 33 Noise Reduction D100 Custom Setting 4 can be adjusted from the Processing tab of the Camera Control window 247 Custom Settings for D1 Series and D100 Cameras The illustrations on the following pages show the settings displayed when the D1x Is con nected The Page 1 Tab The Page 1 tab contains the following settings Custom Settings Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Exposure Bracketing Bracketing order 3 Metered gt Under gt Over AE Flash Bracketing 11 AE and Flash v Autofocus Activate when Shutter Button is pressed half way 4 Focus 4rea Selection 6 Wrap around disabled v Dynamic AF Mode in Single Servo AF 9 Closest Subject Priority v Dynamic AF Mode in Continuous Servo AF 10 Selected AF 4rea Priority EV Steps for Exposure Control 2 173 EY Step v 150 Step Value 20 1 3 EV Step J Center weighted metering area 14 8 mm diameter v Cancel The Exposure Bracketing Area Item Camera Custom Setting T RN AE Flash Bracketing D1 series AE WB Flash Bracketing D100 The Autofocus Area Item Camera Custom Setting Activate when Shutter Button is pressed halfway Focus Area Selection D100 Dynamic AF Mode in Continuous Servo AF D100 D100
198. il click Skip Click Apply to all to apply the orientation of the current thumbnail to all the selected thumbnails and the associated image files Rotation is not applied to the hidden files and Tiles that have already been rotated Rotating JPEG Images Nikon Browser rotates and flips JPEG images without decompressing them first and no drop in image quality results We recommend that you flip or rotate JPEG images in Nikon Browser before opening them in Nikon Capture 4 Editor or another application NEF and TIFF images do not degrade when rotated or saved Do not resize JPEG images before rotation Rotating a resized image may result in a drop in quality at the edges of the picture Rotating Movies Movies cannot be rotated If a movie file is included among the selected thumbnails the movie file will not be displayed in the Rotate Image s dialog 54 Displaying Shooting Data When you select a single thumbnail shooting data Is displayed in the Shooting Data area No shooting data is displayed if no thumbnails are selected or if multiple thumbnails are selected You can show or hide the shooting data by selecting View Shooting Data from the View menu You can also expand or collapse the Shooting Data area by clicking the toggle button a small triangle in the upper left corner Toggle button n Shooting Data Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual
199. in Always upload to current album Always create new album day mon dd hh mm ss YY Publishing to NikonNet An Internet connection is required to publish your images to NikonNet Note that telephone charges and fees charged by your Internet Service Provider ISP may apply When registering for NikonNet you must have an address in the USA with a valid Zip code Uploading Images Nikon View will not disconnect after uploading images via a modem or ISDN terminal adapter Termi nate the connection manually sRGB If Convert image s to sRGB color space is selected in the Color Management tab of the Nikon Browser Preferences dialog xy 112 114 images will be converted to the sRGB color space as they are uploaded to NikonNet QM 264 91 Click OK The images will be uploaded to the selected album Nikon Image Uploader Uploading files to Nikon net Uploading 1 of 1 image jpa Close this dialog when completed Cancel Uploader Dialogs North South and Central America Only This section describes options available in the dialogs displayed when you upload images to NikonNet using the Upload to NikonNet or PDA option in Nikon Browser This option is avail able only in the Americas The Module Selection Dialog This dialog is where you choose whether to upload images to NikonNet or to a hand held device This dialog is not displayed if a hand held device is not currently connected to your compute
200. inals The Settings Menu The Fisheye Lens Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Fisheye ma Lens from the Settings menu White Balance Advanced RAW Vignette Control Noise Reduction Curves Color Balance Unsharp Mask Size Resolution Image Dust Off Digital DEE Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Default 191 gt b gt gt gt gt gt gt b Output Size and Resolution The Size Resolution palette is where you specify the final output size of the portion of the image that will be saved when Save as is selected from the File menu The choice of settings in the Size Resolution palette depends on how you intend to use the image and the amount of storage space you have available Some examples are given below If the image will be used in printing or desktop publishing size and resolution will be dictated by the resolution of the output device and the physical size of the image when printed measured in centimeters or points rather than pixels If you intend to use the image on a web page Specify output size in pixels keeping file size to a minimum for rapid downloads Reso lution in this case is not an issue Adjusting Size and Resolution Display the Size Resolution palette Select the tool palette containing the Size Resolution palette from the View menu the default location for the Size Resolution palette is Tool Palette 1 and click the triangle at th
201. incamucsdcatiheduewauaianasenes sapdhetGumcameneilesied a e eenaa ia ARN EEEa TTEN E 274 NNN EE E A A A A E E E EE E E E 280 iii IV Introduction Before You Begin Sa LSS STO Read this chapter before installing and using Nikon Capture 4 Overview Read this section for a description of how this manual is organized and for an explanation of the symbols and con ventions used The Five Components of Nikon Capture 4 This section describes the components that make up Nikon Capture 4 and introduces some of its more notable fea tures System Requirements Before installing Nikon Capture 4 check that your computer system meets the requirements listed in this section Workflow This section explains how Nikon Capture s various compo nents work together when processing photographs taken in the field or in a studio setting and how batch processing can be used to edit multiple images Overview About This Manual This manual has been written to help you take advantage of the many features included in Nikon Capture 4 This chapter introduces you to Nikon Capture s five components and explains how they can be used as part of different workflows Each of these components is described in greater detail in the chapters that follow The final chapter Technical Notes includes information on how Nikon Capture can be used with other applications that support color management together with troubleshooting instructions and a glos
202. ing Image Window In the Macintosh version of Nikon Capture 4 an empty image window is displayed when Nikon Capture 4 Editor is started by double clicking the application icon In the Windows version the application window is displayed 138 Macintosh Turn the computer on Turn the computer on and wait for the operating system to start up Start Nikon Capture 4 Editor Double click the Nikon Capture 4 Editor icon in the folder to which you installed Nikon Capture 4 e 90o ToolPalettel c D No image displayed in image window Product Key Drop an image file here to open it IF E Color Balance gt Unsharp Mask PS Digita DEE Size Resolution Bird s Eye Information Tool Palette2 gt Advanced RAW I E white Balance gt Noise Reduction gt Image Dust Off Ox vignette Control pix Fisheye Lens If prompted to supply a product key when starting Nikon Capture 4 Editor or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control enter the product key for Nikon Capture 4 Other Ways of Starting the Editor Nikon Capture 4 Editor can be started by double clicking the Nikon Capture 4 icon in the folder to which you installed Nikon Capture 4 Windows Mac OS 9 If Nikon Capture 4 was registered in the Dock during installation Mac OS X users will be able to start Nikon Capture 4 Editor by clicking the Nikon Capture 4 icon in the Dock 139 Exiting Nikon Capture 4 Editor To close the Nikon Capture 4 Ed
203. ion size and zoom ratio under each slide Enable margin between grid cells If you selected a stage grid option that displays multiple slides at the same time checking this op tion leaves margins between slides If this option is not checked no margins will be displayed Grid style Select the format and number of slides to display at the same time 83 84 The Toolbar The toolbar has buttons to control the playback of the slideshow and buttons to specify how the slides are displayed Play Pause button Play mode button Fade button iae button Exit Forward button Back button Resize button button Toggle v Toggles between the slides and the options tab Exit Ie Exits the slideshow Play mode EA Use this button to specify how the slideshow will be played back Select Click to ad vance to switch slides interactively by clicking the mouse button Continuous to play the slideshow again after the last slide is displayed or Random to play the slideshow in random order Back a Displays the previous slide Play Pause u Pauses the slideshow when playing or starts it again when paused When you select Click to advance using the play mode button the button icon takes the shape of a computer mouse on which you can click to display the next slide Mouse icon x Ie 3 dl O gt JEA Forward M Displays the next slide Fade B Use this button to select how one slide fades into or out of another
204. ion is displayed under Use the following program i Use the following program Quick Time Player Spplication Change 110 The Sound Tab Windows Only Use the Sound tab to choose the application that will be used to play back voice memos when image files containing a voice memo are selected in Nikon Browser Preferences Color Management f E Publish to NikonNet or PDA Autolaunch Thumbnails Sttillimage Movie Sound Playback program Use Nikon View Use the default photo editing program selected by your Operating System Use the following program Playback program Use Nikon View Voice memos will be played back in Nikon View Use the default photo editing program selected by your Operating System Select this option to play voice memos in the default audio player for your operating sys tem Use the following program Select this option to play voice memos in the appli Select program cation of your choice To choose a program click Bron Cte Carera Con z Nikon Capture Editor Change and select the program from the Select gt era Program dialog ES Nikon Scan Application a Outlook Express f Paint PictureViewer Application F pmk3 exe QuickTime Player Application QuickTime Updater ath System Configuration Utility EE Sustem Infarmatinn The name of the selected application is displayed under Use the following program f Use the following program
205. irectly are also to ap pear white in the final photograph This adjustment is called white balance White point The input value above which all input tones are mapped to the maximum output value the default for the master channel is white Any details brighter than the white point will be lost See also Tone Tone curve 279 Index A AC adapter 240 260 Adobe Photoshop 208 264 265 267 271 Adobe RGB 265 271 AdobeWide RGB 265 271 Advanced Color tab 210 Advanced RAW palette 152 159 161 Apple RGB 264 271 Apply button 150 Auto contrast 168 Auto contrast clip 210 274 B Batch processing 10 11 201 205 226 229 Bird s Eye palette 144 Bit depth 199 205 228 274 Black point 171 173 274 Brightness 146 178 179 Bruce RGB 264 271 C Camera control 4 5 9 11 215 261 Camera menu 243 245 Channel 168 171 173 176 274 CIE RGB 265 271 CMYK 113 114 211 213 default 114 213 profile 113 212 Color 112 116 146 160 168 177 178 180 210 211 214 Color Balance palette 152 178 180 Color management 112 116 211 214 274 ColorMatch RGB 264 271 Color saturation 160 Color space 126 274 profile 112 116 211 214 264 266 ColorSync 114 213 Color temperature 154 244 CompactFlash card See mem ory card Compression 196 238 Connecting a camera 218 Contrast 178 Contrast slider 178 280 Crop 149 275 selection 149 Crop cursor 149
206. is lost when the file is restored See also JPEG TIFF Crop The portion of the image selected in an image window Curve See Tone Curve Eyedropper A tool for sampling white point black point or midpoint See a so Black point Midpoint White point FireWire Apple s term for the IEEE 1394 interface See IEEE 1394 Fisheye lens A fisheye lens is any lens with a view angle of 180 degrees or more Fisheye lenses may have a view angle of 180 degrees in all directions or only diagonally Distortion increases towards the edges of the picture with little or no distortion at the center of the image The Fisheye Lens palette in Nikon Capture 4 can be used to reduce distortion in images taken with an AF DX Nikkor ED 10 5mm f 2 8G lens to create an image close to what would be produced by an ordinary wide angle lens Gamma Gamma also written y a fundamental property of video systems determines the intensity of the output signal relative to the input When calculating gamma the maximum possible input intensity is assigned a value of one and the minimum possible intensity no input is assigned a value of zero Output is calculated by raising input to the inverse of the gamma value output input Gamut The range of colors that can be expressed by a given input device for example scanner or digital camera output device monitor or printer or color profile No gamut can reproduce all of the colors seen by the huma
207. is not installed install the version of QuickTime bundled with Nikon View 6 COOLPIX series only For more intormation on installation see the Nikon Capture 4 Install Guide Other Ways to Play Movies You can also play movies back by e selecting its thumbnail and clicking View button in the toolbar or select View from the File menu e selecting the thumbnail and pressing the ENTER key Windows or the RETURN key Macintosh Editing Movies To edit a movie select its thumbnail and click the Edit button on the toolbar or select Edit from the File menu This will launch the movie editing program selected in the Movie tab xy 109 of the Preferences dialog 66 Playing Sound Files Selecting Play Sound from the File menu when a voice memo is selected in the thumbnail area opens the selected memo for audio playback In the Windows version of Nikon Capture 4 the application used for audio playback can be selected in the Sound tab of the Preferences dialog 111 If Use Nikon View is selected playback will be gin automatically In the Macintosh version playback is controlled using the buttons in the window shown below Play back sound DSC 0001_way 00 00 00 00 00 01 4 13 Windows 00 00 02 00 00 02 Macintosh On a Macintosh click the play button to start playback New Folder VIEW Edit ctrl E Edit using other programs k Delete Del Delete Sound Rename File or Folder Page Setup Print
208. itor window and exit Nikon Capture 4 open the File menu and choose Exit Windows or Quit Mac OS 9 In Mac OS X select Quit Nikon Capture Editor from the application menu Open Ctrl 0 Close Save Ctrl S Save As Ctrl Shift 5 Create Copy IPTC Information Print Setup Print Ctrl P 1 DSC_0001 NEF 2 DSC_0002 NEF 3 DSC_0003 NEF 4 D5C_0004 NEF Lea Windows Nikon Capture Editor About Nikon Capture Editor Open Close BW Save eS Preferences 98K Save As 35 Services Create Copy IPTC Information Hide Nikon Capture Editor 3H Hide Others H Show All Page Setup Print Quit Nikon Capture Editor Q Mac OS X Mac OS 9 140 Opening Image Files Nikon Capture 4 Editor can be used to open images created with supported cameras and images previously saved using Nikon Capture or Nikon View Original image saved image Extension Uncompressed NEF RAW Compressed NEF RAW et Image saved in NEF a RGB TIFF Y CbCr TIFF DIF Ea Nikon Electronic Image Format TIFF RGB 16 bit TIFF RGB 8 bit TIFF RGB FINE NORMAL BASIC IPEG Files in the above formats can be opened using the Open command or by drag and drop Using the Open Command Click the button or select Open from the File menu The standard Open dialog for your operating system will be displayed in 2 My Pictures TE D5c_000
209. itten to ev D2H Edit Shooting Setting Bank Co Comment Edit Comment dialog Selecting this option opens the Time Lapse Photography dialog 84 230 A Comments for Shooting Menu Banks D2H Only In addition to letters and numbers comments can contain quotes apostrophes spaces and any of i following characters H M W 2 W H 4 g H R e ye U L mg mt Ma and T e sepor nye Ue se u n up 245 Custom Settings Most of the custom settings stored in camera memory can be viewed and adjusted from the Custom Settings window in Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control For more information on Custom Settings see the documentation provided with your camera Select Custom Settings from the Camera menu The Custom Settings dialog will be displayed Custom Settings Custom Settings Bank ov Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Bank a a Autofocus Exposure Bracketing Bracketing order 3 Metered gt Under gt Over w 4E Flash Bracketing 11 4E and Flash v AT E mode priorkyi 1 j Release button AF 5 mode priority a2 Focus Autofocus Group dynamic AF a3 Pattern 1 7 r ee ee ce ee Activate AF when Shutter Button is pressed half way a4 Focus area Illumination a5 Focus 4rea Selection 6 Wrap around disabled v Dynamic AF Mode in Single Servo AF 9 Clos
210. izontal layout only and Rows that will be displayed on each page Thumbnail Size Choose the thumbnail size using the slider 98 A Click Next The following dialog will be displayed Export HTML 2 3 Image Information Settings Specify the information displayed with images Display File Name Display Date and Time Capture Date C Use Date and Time when pictures were last modified Display Shooting Data Shutter speed f stop etc C Display IPTC information Title Keyword and Caption Choose the information that will be displayed next to each image Display File Name Select this option to display the file name When the album Is displayed in a web browser clicking the file name will display the image at a larger size Display Date and Time Choose Capture Date to display the date and time of recording Use Date and Time when pictures were last modified to display the date and time the image was last modified Display Shooting Data Display the camera name shutter speed aperture exposure mode metering exposure compensation white balance and sensitivity Display IPTC information Display the object name caption and keywords to edit IPTC information for selected images before creating an album choose IPTC Information in the File menu Details Click to adjust image size and quality settings for the large images in the album choose whether to include voice memos and movies and choose a file naming conv
211. konNet Attp www nikonnet com More information on on line photo albums and other services available through NikonNet Uploading Images to NikonNet American Customers Only Select images for upload In the thumbnail list area select one or more image file thumbnails to upload 2 Click 9 Click the O button in the Nikon Browser toolbar or select Publish to NikonNet or PDA from the Tools menu Publish to NikonNet or PDA button Transferring Images to a Palm Organizer North South and Central America Only Nikon Browser can be used to transfer images to a Palm organizer if Palm Desk Top and Photobase for Palm were already installed when you installed Nikon View 6 To transfer images e Select Photo Base for Palm Sync from the Service Choice pull down menu in Step 3 of Uploading Images to NikonNet After making sure that your Palm is inserted in the cradle and the cradle is con nected correctly click OK e To transfer the images press the Hot Sync button on the cradle Once transferred images can be viewed on the device s screen You do not need to follow the rest of the steps in the Uploading image files section For instructions on synchronization refer to the documentation provided with your hand held de vice 2 For instructions on installing and using this application refer to the software documentation Transferring Images to a Pocket PC Windows Only Not Available Outside the Americas Nikon B
212. l 218 Connect the camera to your computer and turn the ERMSienmiete neve File Camera Settings Tools Help camera on If you are using a D1 series camera set fa i The D2H is connected the operating mode to PC Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options Enable controls on the camera body Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Exposure Mode Programmed Auto v Shutter Speed i 1 5 sec Aperture i f 3 5 Exposure Comp 0 gt oey Flash Comp OO EV Flexible Program a coma gt 0 Stepts AF and hos Auto Image Rotation D2H Only If On the default setting is selected for Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu the D2H will detect camera orientation and automatically rotate photographs as they are taken note that in continuous mode the rotation applied to the first image in each burst applies to all images in the series even if camera orientation is changed during shooting If Off is selected all images will be recorded in landscape orientation regardless of how the camera is held The options in the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Image menu are not available when the D2H is connected 222 Display the Download Options dialog Click Download Options in the Camera Control window The following dialog
213. l be output exactly as they are input Opening NEF Files Saved in Nikon Capture 3 or Earlier In Nikon Capture 4 changes to color balance apply before changes to curves In earlier versions of Nikon Capture changes to curves applied before changes to color balance with the result that settings may change when the images saved in Nikon Capture 3 or earlier are opened in Nikon Capture 4 168 Input is plotted along the horizontal axis with shadows the dark areas of the image to the left highlights the bright areas of the image to the right and mid tones in between The left end of the axis marks the minimum possible value for colors in the selected channel zero or no color the right end the maximum value In the case of the master curve the minimum value represents areas of the input image that are a true black the maximum value represents areas that are a true white Output is plotted along the vertical axis with the minimum possible output value again zero or no color at the bottom and the maximum output value at the top Highlights n z O O lt WY ININ SISSIES o 1 00 255 Input 151 Output 151 ___ Input Output display When the cursor is moved over the curve edit display the input and output values for the point under the cursor are shown in the input output display The input value represents the level of the pixel in the original image the output value the level of the
214. later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save dis plays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current white balance settings White balance settings are saved with the extension nwb Reset to Recorded Selecting this item restores the value for white balance in effect at the time the Value photograph was taken If the image in the active window was taken with the D2H select this option to copy white balance to a white balance preset or the camera memory card A8 156 Recent white balance settings files up to four are listed at the end of the set Recent files tings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in White Balance palette to the saved settings Advanced Color Open the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences dialog to the Advanced Color tab Options SH 210 Write settings to camera The Settings Menu The White Balance Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting ma White Balance from the Settings menu anii White Balance Advanced RAW Vignette Control Noise Reduction Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Recorded Value Write settings to camera Color Balance Unsharp Mask Size Resolution gt gt gt Curves gt gt gt 158 Advanced RAW The options in the Advanced RAW palette are used to alter exposure compensation image sharpening tone compensation color mode and hue adjustment from the
215. les will be deleted in Mac OS X If this box is not checked the original files on the camera memory card will be left untouched after transfer Add thumbnail icon Macintosh only Check this option to add thumbnail icons to the transferred image files Copy all images marked as hidden Windows only Check this option to transfer all the image files that are marked as hidden Hidden files are not transferred if the box is not checked this option has no effect if files are transferred using PTP Embed ICC color profile during transfer If this option is selected embedded ICC profiles will be included when images taken with D1 series cameras or D100 cameras are transferred This option only takes effect with the D1 which uses the NTSC color space and images taken in Color Mode II Adobe RGB with the D1x firmware version 1 00 or earlier and D1H firmware version 1 00 or earlier The follow ing cameras automatically embed ICC profiles for images taken in Color Mode II even when Embed ICC color profile during transfer is not selected D1x and D1n firmware version 1 10 or later D100 firmware version 2 00 or later and the D2H Color profile information is not included with pictures taken in color modes or Ill optimized for SRGB or with images transferred trom COOLPIX cameras Embed a preview image in NEF files D2H only If this option is checked when pictures taken at an image quality of NEF JPEG are trans ferred
216. less of the channel currently selected in the channel menu sampling the image for midpoint always sets the midpoint for all channels and displays the master channel 173 White Point and Black Point Output Levels Once you have set the input level for the black point and white point output levels can be altered to reflect the actual shade of the darkest and brightest pixels in the image If the darkest shade in the image represents a true black for example the output level for the black point can be left at zero If however darkest shade present in the image is a lighter color the output level for the black point can be raised to achieve more natural coloration The output levels for the white point and black point are set using the white point and black point output sliders on the left side of the curve edit display White point output slider Black point output slider o uo ass A Input 151 Output 151 To set the output level click the slider once to activate it then drag it up or down until you have found the desired output level the output level can also be set by entering a value di rectly in the text box to the left of the slider The effects of the change will be reflected in the active image 174 Setting the Midpoint The point midway between the maximum and minimum input values is known as the midpoint which represents a neutral shade corresponding to an output level of 128 The midpoint is con
217. lication associated with MOV movie files Sound Lists the application associated with WAV sound Tiles Use the Change buttons to specify application associated with each format 32 IPTC Information Clicking the Add additional information IPTC field to images button in the Nikon Transfer dialog displays the IPTC Information dialog where you can specify additional file information such as captions and keywords that can be added to images as they are trans ferred This information can be viewed in Nikon Browser 84 58 Nikon Viewer 130 or Nikon Capture 4 Editor after transfer amp Nikon Transfer Nikon Add additional information IPTC field to images button The IPTC Information dialog offers simple and detail views IPTC Information IPTC Information Caption Categories Category Picnic Supplemental Categories v flowers Caption Writer Nikon Headline Instructions Urgency None BEES Keywords Credit Author Nikon Recorded K ds ecorded Keywords Author s Positon Nikon picnic Recorded Keywords flowers situs Credit Nikon flowers Source Copyright Notice Nikon State Province Tokyo 10 1 2003 Simple View County Japan Transmission Reference
218. list The images in the current folder are displayed as small thumbnail images 41 O SendTo H Start Menu z B A 1 images selected Navigation area Status bar Shows the folder tree a list of drives and folders A 41 or a search control 56 The search control can be used to search for pictures according to user specified conditions To switch between the folder tree and search control click the and I buttons in the toolbar Menu Commands and Tool Buttons Although the majority of operations can be performed using both menu commands and the buttons in the toolbar the explanations in this manual give priority to operations performed using tool buttons 36 Displays such information as the number of images in the selected folder and the number of items selected in the thumbnail list Getting to Know Nikon Browser The names and functions of the buttons in the Nikon Browser window are shown in the fol lowing table Button Name Function Shortcut D Return to the folder that was displayed imme Alt diately before you selected the current folder cmd D Return to the folder displayed immediately be Alt gt fore you clicked the Back button cmd Ctrl U E Up One Level Takes you up one level in the folder hierarchy edy e Ctrl F Ctrl T Add the current folder to your list of favorites oe Favorites select a folder from your favorites Display a list of the ten most recent fol
219. ll File Size EA Set Image size Choose from the following options Z Include sounds Valid only for imagefs with sound Keep the original size Pictures will be the same size as the original images Fit to the new fixed frame size Choose a size using the slider Options range from Small 160 x 120 pixels to Large 1600 x 1200 pixels Apply a fixed reduction ratio to all images Pictures will be reduced by the specitied amount Choose from options ranging from Small 5 to Large 1 4 using the slider Compression Ratio Choose an image quality JPEG compression ratio using the slider Options range from Low high compression ratio small file size to High low compression ratio large file size The lower the compression ratio the better the quality and the larger the file size Include sound s Select this option to export voice memos to the HTML album A play button will be displayed next to the thumbnail of the associated image clicking the button plays the voice memo Compatible Web Browsers Albums created in Nikon Browser are compatible with Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later and with Netscape Navigator 4 0 or later Image Files ICC profiles are included in images exported in HTML albums Thumbnail data and photo information are not included 101 The Movies Tab Select Output Movie to include movies in the album Stil images Movies File Name Output Movie Output Movie
220. ll be reset and the RGB master channel will be displayed in the Curve palette 176 The Curves Settings Menu Clicking the IE button in the Curves palette displays the Curves Settings menu Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Neutral Advanced Color Options Input 180 Gutpukt 246 Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Curves settings to the clipboard Select this item to load curves previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension ncv will be displayed The settings in the Curves palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save curves for all channels to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current curves Curves are saved with the extension ncv Reset to Neutral Reset all curves to linear Recent Curves settings files up to four are listed at the end of the settings Recent files menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Curves palette to the saved settings Advanced Color Open the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences dialog to the Advanced Color Options tab The Settings Menu The Curves Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Curves from th
221. low 190 The Fisheye Lens Settings Menu Clicking the IE button in the Fisheye Lens palette displays the Fisheye Lens Settings menu gt fisheye Lens Copy to Clipboard Load Save ail eala Reset to Default Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Fisheye Lens settings to the clipboard Select this item to load Fisheye Lens settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the Load drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nfe will be displayed The settings in the Fisheye Lens palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save Fisheye Lens settings to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Fisheye Lens settings Fisheye Lens settings are saved with the extension nfe Reset to Default Reset Fisheye Lens settings to default values Recent Fisheye Lens settings files up to four are listed at the end of the settings Recent files menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Fisheye Lens palette to the saved settings Save Vertical Compensation Because the edges are trimmed when vertical compensation is in effect images saved with the Apply button checked have a smaller file size than the orig
222. ly as they are captured from the camera live batch Step 1 Connect the camera e If Nikon Transfer starts click Close to exit D1 series D100 or D2H camera Computer v Step 2 Start Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 215 v Step 3 Take a test shot v Step 4 Adjust settings Nikon Capture 4 Editor 6 135 e Modify picture amp 150 e Save settings 4 195 v Step 5 Choose batch options Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 215 Live Batch dialog 226 e Adjust settings v Step 6 Take pictures lt gt Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 215 11 12 Nikon Transfer Copying Pictures to Your Computer Nikon Transfer is used to transfer copy pictures from the camera memory card to your computer When transferring pictures Nikon Transfer allows you to select the type of im ages to be transferred choose transfer options specify the destination folder for transferred images and choose how transferred images will be named on the computer This chapter is divided into the following two sections The Nikon Transfer Window This section outlines the controls and displays in the Nikon Transfer window and describes how to start exit and re start Nikon Transfer Transferring Images Read this section for instructions on transferring images from a camera memory card to a folder
223. ly using controls e Time lapse photography on camera body S84 230 e Take pictures from e Photos saved directly to Camera Control disk R 4 222 v Step 4 View pictures Nikon Viewer 119 e View pictures Hi 124 Nikon Browser 35 e Select pictures i 51 Vv Step 5 Edit pictures Nikon Capture 4 Editor 135 e Modify pictures 150 e Save modified pictures 4 196 e Print pictures amp 200 Workflow 3 Batch Processing Existing Images Nikon Capture 4 includes a batch option for automatic processing of multiple images either as they are captured from a D1 series D100 or D2H camera see Workflow 4 or after they have been saved to disk using Nikon Transfer or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control To process images after they have been saved to disk Step 1 Transfer pictures A CF CARD Memory card Camera Card reader or PC card slot Computer Nikon Transfer amp 13 e Select type of pictures to be transferred 28 e Select destination 0 24 Vv Step 2 Select pictures Nikon Browser 35 e Select pictures 51 v Step 3 Adjust settings Nikon Capture 4 Editor amp 135 e Modify pictures i 150 e Save settings h 195 v Step 4 Process pictures Batch dialog W201 e Process pictures 4 201 10 Workflow 4 Batch Processing Studio Photography To process photographs automatical
224. mum length for Macintosh file names is thirty one characters Colons are not allowed 223 When a new image is received from camera Choose the application that will be used to display captured photographs Do nothing Photographs are saved to the computer hard disk View with Nikon Viewer After the image is saved to disk Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer will start automatical ly The destination folder for captured images will be opened in Nikon Browser with the captured image selected and the captured image will be displayed in Nikon Viewer Show it with the Nikon View Browser After the image is saved to disk Nikon Browser will start automatically The destina tion folder for captured images will be opened in Nikon Browser with the captured image selected Attach IPTC Information Check this option to add IPTC information to captured images A amp 33 and enable the Copy Shooting Data to IPTC Caption option IPTC Information Clicking this button displays a dialog where you can select the IPTC information includ ing keywords and captions that will be added to images as they are captured For more information see Nikon Transfer A amp 33 Copy Shooting Data to IPTC Caption Check this option to copy shooting data to the caption field of images as they are captured After adjusting the above options click OK to exit the dialog and apply settings to subse quent photographs A Choose whether to rotate cap
225. n Capture 4 Camera Control RGB Color Space Profiles See Appendix A fh 264 for more information on the default color space profiles EJ The Information Palette The color space profile for the image in the active window Is displayed in the Information palette E 146 212 The Color Management Tab Macintosh The Macintosh version displays the protile names selected in the ColorSync control panel Mac OS 9 or in System Preferences Mac OS X Preferences ColorSync Default Profiles for Documents General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines f Color Management Note Making changes to items on this page will also affect Nikon View and Nikon Capture Control RGB Default Generic RGB Profile g Use RGB Default instead of an embedded profile when opening files CMYK Default Generic CMYK Profile e Open ColorSync p eee Device Profiles Change Display Profile SL Help ColorSync Default Profiles for Documents ee The default color space profiles are displayed in this area Clicking the Open ColorSync button opens the ColorSync dialog to a panel where you can choose the default profiles for the RGB and CMYK color spaces RGB Default Lists the output ICC color space profile used when working with RGB images If Use RGB Default instead of an embedded profile when opening files is checked this RGB color space profile will be used for all ima
226. n Browser Browser Window Operations ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeess 41 Working wiih I VAS osana tartan atc a E aTa G O a A cba us ietienet chiens cance pul ae Sede 41 Working Cn ACI IWS Mil cS cenestrenattoncctindatea te Eei AE E E EERE OAE EEE ENAT AE SAE 48 Displaying Shooting Dala sereen ninaa EEEE Ea SEEE ON ETER A E E aai 59 NMI MATA E EN PEE A I E N EE A AA EA AN 56 Viewing Mie ME OMIM ATOM ru usacrdausseasienr awtiaccuadonsns lester N EEES EAEEREN Eae 58 US TA MG AS NCS seccinetearexarest ace seston woe ghar dite scent EEEE EE EEE it aE tan RAEE EEE E 60 Sa WMD TMS CS enana oan sesnsmt wu tiateqare ante datintnes E EEE eye EE EE EAEE 61 FP UC SUA E E EE A coe A TAA E AT Gaecdbaa ba bensiaananGanctendan tes 67 Editing Mage Fle Sermano ne Suc tase cae doe dca at a EAA A GEER 68 RE e E EA E E A ASAA SA A AA E A A A a 71 Creating a Photo CD Windows XP sirrinin a e aaa TAa Ena AATA ia 75 Creating a Photo CD or DVD Mac OS X 10 2 3 or Later svcciinissiuausassasavenvendcanwosessarsvanvenveriostaensaesenses 78 ea IPE A OE aor EE EE A EE E E EEEE 80 INS E EET E E A AE O E AES E E 82 senang Images Dy E Mail ss hicinxseatintgcstenien stun sit iaaiaee EEA EEEa ETDE EAEE 86 wee aR E E E AEE E AE E EE E A A E T 89 creatina ATME ADUM urria inaia a E EEE E TA EEN 98 Nikon Browser Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon BrOWSEL cesscccceceeeeeeeeeeeeessesseesenenaneees 103 The General Tab Macintosh Only sicivsciccd
227. n EH 4 AC adapter available separately to power the camera Hard Disk Full A warning will appear when space is no longer available on the destination disk for photographs taken using time lapse photography Use the information in the warning to reduce the number of photo graphs or change the destination drive 232 The Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Window The Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window shows current camera settings which may be viewed by clicking the five page selection tabs Camera settings can be altered using the controls in each tab as described below The simulated LCD panel and the Hide Camera Controls Download Options and shoot buttons can be accessed from all five tabs Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Settings Tools Help Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Image Settings Tools Help The D2H is connected f Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options sta t us Enable controls on the camera body mer ntrol Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Ca era Co t O The D100 is connected C onnec t i on Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Stor
228. n Windows if you delete image files from the memory card inserted in the camera card slot or card reader or from a network folder the image files are permanently erased and cannot be recovered 133 Nikon Viewer Preferences Fine Tuning Nikon Viewer To display the Nikon Viewer Preferences dialog select Preferences from the Edit menu Windows Mac OS 9 or the application menu Mac OS X You can also display the Prefer ences dialog box by clicking the Preferences tool button For more information see Nikon Browser Preferences A amp 103 Nikon View 6 Select Image s R About Nikon View 6 Preferences K Windows Mac OS 9 Mac OS X The Preferences dialog contains the following tabs Description Tab General Macintosh only Choose the volume used for temporary storage Choose whether Nikon Transfer starts automatically when a Auto Launch l memory card from a supported camera is detected l Choose whether to create thumbnails from the original image Thumbnails data Still image Choose the applications that will be used to play back or edit still images iode Choose the applications that will be used to play back or edit movies Sound Choose the application that will be used to play back voice Windows only memos Color Management Select the color profiles used by the Nikon Color Management 112 114 System CMS Publish to NikonNet or PDA o Amenic only Options for uploading images
229. n eye The gamut of primary RGB Red Green and Blue transmitted light displays film transparencies and color monitors is very different from and complementary to the gamut of secondary CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow and blacK re flected light displays printed materials See also CMYK Profile RGB Gray point See Midpoint 2 5 Halo width The extent of pixels around a selected central pixel affected when Unsharp Mask is applied Also referred to as radius Increasing the halo width increases the width of edges affected by Unsharp Mask Excessive application of Unsharp Mask results in an undesirable halo along edges in the image See also Unsharp Mask Histogram A bar graph showing the distribution of tones in an image The horizontal axis shows tone level brightness the vertical axis the number of pixels The bars in the graph show the number of pixels of a given brightness in the image The histogram displayed in the Curves window shows the distribution of tones for the currently selected channel and can be used tor reference when editing curves See a so Tone Tone curve ICC The International Color Consortium an international organization working to develop stan dards for color management and color management profiles ICC profiles were developed for the conversion of color space information between devices and are now on their way to becoming a global standard ICC profiles have been proposed as an International Orga
230. n not be viewed on a camera Q The Button Clicking the Hl button saves any changes to the current file overwriting the original image The Save dialog is not displayed 197 Choose a location Navigate to the desired drive volume and folder Choose a file type Choose a file type file format from the pop up menu See Choosing a File Type S amp 196 for more information Adjust compression settings If NEF is chosen in Step 3 when saving uncompressed RAW images compression can be turned on by selecting Use Compression Uncompressed RAW images saved at this setting will be compressed using a lossless compression algorithm This check box is au tomatically enabled when a compressed RAW image is saved Compressed RAW images can not be saved in uncompressed format Use Compression is automatically selected when images are saved in JPEG format The compression ratio can be selected from Highest Compression Ratio Good Compres sion Ratio Good Balance Good Quality and Excellent Quality Enter a name for the file The default file name appears in the File name text box A new Tile name can be entered if desired Click Save Click Save to save the file under the specified name Y File Naming Conventions Windows n environments that do not support long file names the maximum length is eight char acters file names may not contain spaces quotes or any of the following characters WV Z
231. n that can not afterwards be restored Save files at the lowest compression ratio possible if necessary they can always be saved again at a lower compression ratio 196 Options for Saving Image Files Nikon Capture offers two options for saving Tiles Save and Save as The Save option saves the image in the same location as the original without changing the file name or for mat The Save as option lets you choose a location file name and format Using the Save Command To save changes to an image without cre ating a new file click the H button or select Save from the File menu The existing file will be overwritten If the image is in JPEG format a dialog will be displayed where the compression ratio can be selected from Highest Compression Ratio Good Com pression Ratio Good Balance Good Quality and Excellent Quality Save button Using the Save as Command Select Save As from the File menu The standard Save dialog for your operating system will be a care d isp layed f Save Ctrl 5 Save As Ctrl Shift 5 A My Pictures ED Sample Pictures ul My Recent Documents My Network PI aces Fle name DSC_O001 ti Save button Save as type TIFF Format RGB Cancel U e Compre sion Osbit 16 bit C Open with Adobe Photoshop 7 0 1 Images Saved in Nikon Capture 4 Images saved in Nikon Capture 4 ca
232. n to letters and numbers comments can contain quotes apostrophes spaces and any ol the following characters pa wga ar g y Q a Ee j ae ger a Uk ee ao lg lt mM nag and T EJ White Balance If desired white balance can be used to produce an intentionally unbalanced rendering of a scene 237 The Storage Tab The following settings can be adjusted from the Storage tab Data Format The following data formats are available RAW 12 bit JPEG 8 bit D2H only RAW 12 bit TIFF RGB 8 bit TIFF YCbCr 8 bit D1 series only and JPEG 8 bit This setting determines pixel bit depth and file size Compression When data format is set to JPEG 8 bit or RAW 12 bit JPEG 8 bit D2H only you can choose the image quality JPEG compression setting trom Fine Normal and Basic Color Choose from Color and Black amp White D1 series only Black amp White is not avail able with the D100 or D2H or when RAW is selected for Data Format Image Size Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Settings Tools Help The D2H is connected Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Enable controls on the camera body Download Options Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Data Format RAW 12 bit Compression Color Image Size _ Raw comp
233. nal image has a bit depth of over eight bits Y File Naming Conventions Windows n environments that do not support long file names the maximum length is eight char acters file names may not contain spaces quotes or any of the following characters WV 77 i wi Wal i wae and H lias Where long file names are supported the maximum length is 255 characters file names may not con tain quotes or any of the following characters W Z7 i o y x 9 lt gt and V Macintosh The maximum length for Macintosh file names is thirty one characters Colons are not allowed Error Messages If an invalid file name or other error is identified in the Live Batch dialog a message will be displayed Return to the Live Batch dialog and adjust settings as directed in the message 228 Choose whether to save original photographs In the Archive section choose whether to save unprocessed copies of the photographs captured from the camera Save Unmodified Files Check this option to save both the original image and copies processed according the options selected in the Image Adjustments section Save to This text box shows the folder to which unprocessed images will be saved To choose a new folder click the Browse button to the right of the text box and navigate to the desired location Click Start Click Start to put the selected settings into effect A progress dialog will be displayed
234. names will be created in the destination folder Periodically check for new files in this folder When this option is checked Nikon Capture 4 will check for new images in the specified folder once every ten seconds Delete files from this folder after they are processed Check this option to delete image files from the selected folder after processing A warn ing dialog will be displayed before batch processing begins Selecting Folders for Batch Processing For improved efficiency create two folders that are used only for batch processing The images to be processed can be copied to one of these folders which might be named Batch In If the Delete files from this folder after they are processed option is checked these files will automatically be deleted from the Batch In folder after processing allowing you to copy more files to the folder without wor rying about the files already there be sure to leave a copy of any images you would like to keep in their original state in another folder 202 Specify how images will be processed In the Image Adjustments section specify the operations to be performed on each im age Apply current settings Select this option to process the images in the selected folder using the settings currently in effect in Nikon Capture 4 Editor To change settings before beginning ll batch Process mg click Change Set This will pause the current operation so that you can make changes to the Image
235. ncrease contrast in the desired tone range or if shadow brightness is affecting too great an area EJ Threshold Ideally the threshold for shadow adjustment should be twenty to E forty greater than the highest of the R and G values in the brightest Information shadows The threshold for highlight adjustment should be twenty to Nikon sRGE forty less than lowest of the R and G values in the darkest highlights wo g2 Ri 185 To choose a threshold that can be used for both shadows and high Yi 838 G 177 lights enter the average of the highest value R or G in the brightest F B 13 shadows and the lowest value R or G in the darkest highlights Color Avg 160 values can be determined by moving the cursor over the image and observing the R and G values in the Information palette 188 The Digital DEE Settings Menu Clicking the IE button in the Digital DEE palette displays the Digital DEE Settings menu E H pigital DEE Copy to Clipbaord Load Save Reset to Default Highlight adjustment pon b Threshold q Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Digital DEE settings to the clipboard Select this item to load Digital DEE settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the Load drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension ndd will be displayed The settings
236. nd the image differ part of the image may not be printed 73 Use thumbnail data Check this option to print the pictures at draft resolution using thumbnail data Recom mended for draft prints only Printer type Choose from Inkjet printer or All other Printer type types yP Inkjet printer s Inkjet printer All other types Inkjet printer We recommend this option when printing on inkjet or color laser printers The selected images will be printed at high quality and speed at the highest resolution supported by the printer if the printer supports resolutions higher than 360 dpi the images will print at 360 dpi All other types Select this option when printing in color on devices that use dye sublimation or photographic processes The selected images will be printed at the highest resolution supported by the printer Print soeed may drop if you choose this option when using an inkjet printer Normal Print Save Print Image as file Select whether to print images on a printer or to save the page as an image file Normal Print Normal Print Save Print image as file Outputs the selected images to a printer Save Print Image as file Windows Save image files Macintosh Saves the page as a JPEG file using the layout specified in the Page Layout dialog When this option is selected the Print button in the Page Layout dialog will change to Save Clicking the Save button displays the Save Im
237. nected the current metering mode will be shown but changes can only be made using camera controls See the camera manual for details Flash Sync Mode This option controls the camera flash sync mode Sensitivity Sensitivity ISO equivalency can be raised when taking photographs in low light conditions See the user s manual provided with your camera for details Auto D100 D2H only When this option is checked the camera will adjust sensitivity ISO equivalency automatically ISO auto 236 White Balance White balance is used to ensure that colors which appear white when viewed directly are white in the final photograph See the camera manual for details Fine Tune Set Temp Click Fine Tune to make fine adjustments to white balance amp 153 If Choose color temp is selected D2H only this button will be labeled Set temp Click this button to choose a color temperature 84 244 Fine tuning is not available with preset white bal ance Comment D2H only This field lists the comments for all white balance presets Edit D2H only This button is only available when Preset is selected for gS com R white balance Clicking Edit displays the dialog shown at right where the comments for each of the white balance presets can be edited After entering descriptive comments of up to thirty six characters each click OK to copy the com ments to the camera G Comments D2H Only In additio
238. ned sample image can be selected by clicking the Sample Image button Any changes to curves are reflected in the sample image To copy the edited curve to the camera click OK The upper left section of the Edit Camera Curves window contains Load and Save buttons By clicking the Load button previously stored curves with less than 20 spline points can be selected via the Open dialog if the selected file has more than 20 spline points a warning will be displayed and no file will be loaded Look for files with the ntc extension The Save button opens the Save As dialog where you can save the current curve 243 Fine Tune White Balance Selecting this option displays the dialog shown at right where white balance can be fine tuned between 3 and 3 The value selected for Add to Auto will be added to the white balance setting the camera chooses for auto white balance Clicking Reset returns all values to defaults Click OK to apply the current settings to the camera or click Cancel to discard any changes and return to the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window Set Color Temperature D2H only Selecting this option displays the dialog shown at right where color temperature can be chosen from a menu The value chosen takes effect whenever Choose color temp is selected for white balance Click OK to apply the cur rent settings to the camera or click Cancel to discard any changes and return to the
239. ng system that is on its way to becoming the industry standard in the United States of America Software and hardware manufacturers use it as a default color profile and guarantee op eration when It used It is also on its way to becoming the standard for images on the web This profile is suited to users who plan to use their digital images as is without editing or printing them It however suffers from the drawback of a narrow gamut with a limited area available for reproducing blues The corresponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop 5 0 and 5 5 is SRGB the corresponding setting in Adobe Photoshop 6 0 sRGB IWC61966 2 1 Bruce RGB Nikon Bruce RGB 4 0 0 3000 This color profile attempts to expand on the ColorMatch RGB gamut by defining the chroma ticity for G as lying between the values for G in the Adobe RGB and ColorMatch color space profiles It was proposed by Bruce Fraser who claims that it includes most of the colors in the SWOP CMYK gamut The R and B used in the Bruce RGB and Adobe RGB color space profiles match NTSC 1953 Nikon NTSC 1953 4 0 0 3000 This is the color space for video defined by the National Television Standards Committee NTSC in 1953 and used in early color televisions This color space is also used in some Far East newspaper and printing organizations The corresponding RGB setting in Adobe Photoshop is NTSC 1953 264 Supported Color Profiles Adobe RGB 1998 Nikon Adobe RGB 1998
240. ng the Load option Save Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Color Balance settings Color Balance settings are saved with the extension nca Reset to Neutral Resets all brightness contrast and color balance settings to zero Recent Color Balance settings files up to four are listed at the end of the Recent files settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Color Balance palette to the saved settings The Settings Menu The Color Balance Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Color El Image Adjustments gt Balance from the Settings menu White Balance gt Advanced RAW gt vignette Control gt Noise Reduction gt Curves gt Copy to Clipboard Unsharp Mask gt Load Size Resolution gt Save b gt Image Dust Off Reset to Neutral Digital DEE lp 180 Unsharp Mask Using Unsharp Mask the user can increase the sharpness of photographs by making edges more distinct Unsharp Mask works by increasing the contrast of the edges in the image while leaving other areas untouched The amount of sharpness is determined by three fac tors intensity halo width and threshold Creating Unsharp Masks Display the Unsharp Mask palette Select the tool palette containing the Unsharp Mask palette trom the View menu the default location for the Unsharp Mask palette is Tool Palette 1 and click
241. ng you Ctrl 0 127 to scroll the current image using the mouse cmd 0 Fit Image to Adjust the zoom ratio of the current image to fit the Ctrl 5 125 Window Nikon Viewer window cmd 5 Fit Image to Adjust the zoom ratio of the current image to fit Ctrl 7 125 Desktop the desktop cmd 7 Opens the current image in the designated image Ctrl E 127 editing program cmd E Add Tag Mark Tag the current image CE E M 128 l cmd M Remove Tag Ctrl Shift M Remove the tag from the current image chime 128 Prints the current image Sls 128 cmd P The images currently opened in Nikon Viewer are m 129 displayed in an automated slideshow E emai Append the current image to an e mail message o pe Upload all images in the current selection to the Publish to Web residents of the USA only or a Pocket PC or NikonNetor Palm hand held device This button is only avail 129 PDA able in the version of Nikon View released in the Americas l l Ctrl K Display Nikon View 6 preferences dialog F1 Windows keyboard shortcuts are listed first Macintosh shortcuts second 121 The Nikon Viewer Window Starting Nikon Viewer Nikon Viewer is started from Nikon Browser 1 Select images Select the still images you wish to view from the thumbnail list in Nikon Browser 2 click 8 Click the View button or select View from the File menu Nikon Viewer will start and the selected images will be displayed Nikon View
242. ngs Low Quality High l Good Balance 5 mall File Size Large sRGB If Convert image s to sRGB color space is selected in the Color Management tab xy 112 114 of the Nikon Browser Preferences dialog images sent by e mail will be converted to the sRGB color space AN 264 Using E mail In order to use the e mail option in Nikon View 6 your computer must be correctly configured to send e mail Note that you may incur charges from your Internet service provider and telephone company when you send e mail Voice Memos Voice memos attached to Exif files can not be sent by e mail 86 Current e mail program When you click Send see following page your e mail will be sent using the application shown here Send image s as attachments Choose whether to send the selected images as individual files or in contact sheets con taining multiple images Send image s as individual attachments Select Resize to small pictures to send Original pictures will be untouched to create small copies of the selected images to attach to an e mail message or Keep the Original sizes the files may be very large to create copies the same size as the selected images When Resize to small pictures to send Original pictures will be untouched is selected the attachments can be resized using the slider Seven different sizes are available Send image s as contact sheet Put multiple images in one sheet as attachme
243. nnected to a camera or a card Disable auto launch Auto launch when connected to a camera or a card Select this option to launch Nikon View 6 automatically when you turn the camera on and connect it to your computer or when you insert the memory card into the card reader or card slot When Nikon View 6 launches the Nikon Transter window will open Disable auto launch Select this option if you do not want Nikon Transfer to launch automatically when a camera is connected or a memory card is inserted Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional In Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional the Disable auto launch option is effec tive only with the D1 D1x D1H and COOLPIX990 880 cameras When other cameras are connected the Disable auto launch option is ignored and Nikon Transfer launches automatically Mac OS X In Mac OS X images can not be transfered when Nikon Transfer is started manually by selecting Launch Nikon Transfer from the Tools menu in Nikon Browser Be sure to select Auto launch when con nected to a camera or card before transferring images 105 The Thumbnails Tab The Thumbnails tab contains options that determine how the thumbnails displayed in the Nikon Browser thumbnail list area are created Preferences Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA Auto launch Thumbnails Stilimage Movie Sound Create C Re create thumbnails from actual image data When
244. nt Choose this option to create attachments consisting of one or more contact sheets each of which contains multiple images displayed together in a single image file Specify the size of the contact sheet using the Size of the page of contact sheet s slider five sizes are available and choose how the pictures in each contact sheet will be arranged using the Number of column s control The current background color for all contact sheets is shown next to Background color box to select a new color click Choose If Print file name as title is selected file names will appear on the images in the contact sheet Quality settings This slider controls how much the copies will be compressed Five settings are available the lower the compression ratio the better the quality and the larger the file size Note that if Keep the original sizes is selected when files are sent as image attachments the existing compression ratios of any JPEG images in the selection will not be changed if e The Convert image s to sRGB color space check box in the Color Management panel of the Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer Preferences dialog is off or e No ICC profile is embedded in the image or the picture was recorded in the sRGB color space i e the picture was taken with a COOLPIX camera or with a D1x D1H 100 or D2H camera in color mode or Ill which are optimized for the sRGB color space E mail Applications The following e mail applications
245. ntaining only the selected palette Tools can be added to the new window by dragging in additional palettes The new window will be added to the View menu in Nikon Capture 4 Editor If you close the new window by clicking the window close box you can open it again by selecting the desired palette trom the View menu The Edit Indicator The edit indicator turns green if palette set tings have been adjusted since the image in the active window was created NEF images or last saved other images making it clear at a glance which palettes have been used e NEF images Tool Palette 1 l gt Curves gt g Color Balance i Unsharp Mask Digital DEE gt 20 Shadow adjustment 4 gt gi digital DEE Indicator Indicator turns green when settings are adjusted Changes to settings made in Nikon Capture 4 Editor are not applied directly to the image data when a photograph is saved in NEF format Instead the original image is saved un changed with the changed settings stored separately in the same Tile These settings are loaded when the image is opened with the result that all indicators that were green when the image was saved will be green when the image is next opened e Other images Changes to settings are applied directly to the image when the image is saved The edit indicators only reflect changes made since the image was last saved Resetting the
246. ntrol panel Mac OS 9 or the Displays section of the System Preferences dialog Mac OS X Click the Color button Mac OS 9 or open the Color panel Mac OS X to choose a display profile Use profile for printing If this option is checked the profile listed in the Printer text box will be used when print ing images Note that CMYK profiles can not be used in Nikon Capture 4 if a CMYK profile is selected the status of the Use profile for printing check box can not be changed If Use profile for printing is not selected images will be printed using the default RGB profile Intent If you have chosen to use a printer profile the type of matching to be performed can be selected from Relative and Perceptual Depending on the profile changing the match ing method may produce no change in output This option is not supported with some profiles consult the manufacturer for details Relative Colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile will be printed using the closest colors available Other colors are not affected Perceptual If the image contains colors not in the gamut of the selected printer profile all colors in the image will be compressed to fit the gamut 115 Color Space Conversion Specify the settings on color space conversion in this section Convert image s to sRGB color space Check this option to convert the color space of image s to sRGB when you sent the image s by e mail upload to NikonNet export as
247. nu which also contains an option for restoring all tool palettes to default settings Settings Image Adjustments Copy to Clipboard Chrl ShiFt 0 eer Load Ctrl L SE SENHE Save Ctrl I Advanced RAW vignette Control Reset to User Default Moise Reduction Curves Color Balance Unsharp Mask Size Resolution Image Dust OFF Digital DEE Fisheye Lens Tr FF FF FF FF OF F F F Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to User Default Recent files All image adjustment settings for the image in the active window are copied to the clipboard You can paste them into the tool palettes for another window by selecting Paste from the Edit menu when the window is active Select this item to load settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension set will be displayed The settings in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor tool palettes will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save settings to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current settings If this file is later selected for batch processing images will be processed according to the settings in the file M 201 226 Combination settings files ar
248. o their default values 210 The Grid Lines Tab The Grid Lines tab controls the color and Spacing of the non printing grid lines over laid on an image when Show Grid Lines is selected from the Image menu Color The color of the grid lines can be selected trom white light gray dark gray black red green blue cyan magenta and yellow Display grid line every Enter a value for grid spacing in the text box The units for the grid can be selected from the pop up menu to the right of the text box The options available are pixels inches millimeters centimeters picas and points at settings other than pixels grid spacing can be entered up to two decimal points Display n subdivisions per line Options General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management Color Black Display grid line every 1 00 inches i Display 4 subdivisions per line The number of subdivisions into which each grid cell will be divided The main grid is dis played as solid lines of the color specified using the Color option the subgrid as broken lines of the same color The Color Management Tab Windows The Color Management tab is where you specify the color management profiles used tor displaying images on your monitor ed iting and saving RGB images and saving and printing CMYK images Change Display Profile To choose a display profile click Change Display Profile
249. o transfer pictures from the camera to your computer hard disk Once transferred pictures can be pre viewed in Nikon Browser Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control will bypass the CF card and be downloaded r until this window is closed Download Options Enable controls on the camera body Exposure Mode Shutter Speed lt 4 J 1 5 sec Aperture 4 gt Fs sure Comp Flash Comp lt Flexible Progr am Use with a Nikon D1 D1x D1 D100 or D2H digital camera to control the camera from your computer and save photos directly to disk as they are taken Y Nikon Viewer DSC_0001 NEF 25 File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ec gt Data flow bla a mot E m E Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattem Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EY Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Nikon Browser Shooting Data Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RaW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size L
250. og you can select the on line photo album to which images will be uploaded or create a new album for the uploaded files Choose Album Current Albums Skyscraper w Create New Album C Don t show this dialog again Always upload to current album Always create new album day _mon_dd_hh_mm_ss yyy Click OK to close this dialog and upload the selected images to the album selected under Current Albums Click Cancel to exit without uploading the selected images Current Albums Select the destination album from the drop down menu The selected images will be uploaded to this aloum when you click OK Create New Album To create a new album enter a name and description for the album in the Name and Description text boxes and click Cre ate The new album will be added to the list of current albums alpha numeric characters recommended Description New Album Information Mame Don t show this dialog again Check this option to skip the Choose Album dialog the next U Don t show this dialog again time you upload images When this option is selected you must choose whether images will be automatically uploaded to the last album selected in the Current Albums menu or to a new album created automatically when the images are uploaded To display the Choose Album dialog again click Clear in the Publish to NikonNet or PDA tab of the Prefer ences dialog 4 117 Always upload to current album Select this option
251. olution settings Size and resolution settings are saved with the extension W Ww tsr Reduces RAW images created with the D1x by 74 9 to 3 008 x 1 960 pixels six megapixels Select Reset to 100 to restore the image to 4 016x2 616 pixels This option is only available with RAW images taken using the D1x Enlarges the crop to include the entire image Resolution will be reset to the default value of 300 ppi 118 11 ppcm Recent Size Resolution settings files up to four are listed at the end of the settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Size Resolution palette to the saved settings The Settings Menu The Size Resolution Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Size Image Adjustments gt Resolution from the Settings menu shiv ieee 194 gt Advanced RAW gt vignette Control gt Noise Reduction gt Curves gt Color Balance gt Unsharp Mask gt Copy to Clipboard Image Dust Off gt Load Digital DEE gt Save Fisheye Lens gt f Reset to 100 Saving and Loading Image Adjustment Settings Image adjustment settings for all tool palettes including the status of the Apply button for each palette can be copied to the clipboard and saved in combined settings file When the combined settings are pasted or read into the Nikon Capture 4 Editor they will apply to all palettes simultaneously These operations are performed using the commands in the Settings gt Image Adjustments me
252. om the group menu or by clicking the Next and Prev buttons Custom Settings Baki Y Group menu a Autofocus v AF C mode priority a1 Release button v AF S mode priority a2 Focus v Group dynamic AF a3 Pattern 1 v Activate AF when Shutter Button is pressed half way a4 Focus area Illumination a5 Show Focus 4rea when Manually Focusing Show Focus 4rea when using a Continuous Shooting mode Focus 4rea Illumination OFF Delay 0 2 second v Focus Area Selection a6 Wrap around disabled W Vertical AF Button a7 AF ON Focus area v Prev Next buttons GJ Lee Comments D2H Only In addition to letters and numbers comments can contain quotes apostrophes spaces and any of the following characters ons aes sal oa a ee a gn H p R me a i ir ge ae UE H Ee cyst ted un mee ot Vise oe and Q 252 Autofocus The Autofocus group contains the following settings Custom Settings a Autofocus AF C mode priority a1 Release button AF S mode priority a2 Focus Group dynamic AF a3 Pattern 1 Activate AF when Shutter Button is pressed half way a4 Focus area Illumination a5 Show Focus 4rea when Manually Focusing Show Focus Area when using a Continuous Shooting mode Focus 4rea Illumination Off Delay 0 2 second Focus 4
253. ome time may be required for the image to be updated Adjust settings until the desired results are achieved Digital DEE Digital DEE is available only with images created using the Nikon digital cameras supported under Nikon Capture 4 D1 D1x D1 D2H D100 and COOLPIX cameras with the exceptions of the E100 E300 and E600 Images must be in their original file formats Monotone Shadows Shadow adjustment has no effect if details in shadows have been totally obliterated leaving shadows a single uniform color 186 Enhancing Details in Highlights Digital DEE can also be used to reveal details in highlights where the background is much brighter than the subject or the subject much brighter than the background To enhance details in highlights click More gt H digital DEE Shadow adjustment 4 j P More button Hl Digital DEE f lt lt Less i Highlight adjustment 4 gt Highlight adjustment Threshold 4 __ j gt 150 slider and text box Adjust highlights using the Highlight adjustment slider or by entering a value between 1 and 100 in the text box to Its right Increasing highlight adjustment increases contrast in highlights while decreasing highlight adjustment has the opposite effect The default value is 20 The effects of changes to highlights will be visible in the image in the active window some time may be required for the image to be updated Adjust settings until the de
254. on Capture 4 Help A Nikon Capture 4 ReadMe jay Nikon Capture 4 Uninstall s Remote Assistance PULTE IE F Windows Media Player Log Off g Turn Off Computer Product Key If prompted to supply a product key when starting Nikon Capture 4 Editor or Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control enter the product key for Nikon Capture 4 Other Ways of Starting Camera Control Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control can be started by double clicking the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control icon in the folder to which you installed Nikon Capture 4 218 The Camera Control window will be displayed Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Ima Settings Tools Help The D2H is connected f Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options Enable controls on the camera body Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Exposure Mode Programmed Auto v Shutter Speed si 1 5sec Aperture 4 J F3 5 Exposure Comp 4 J gt OEV Flash Comp i OEV Flexible Program 4 gt 0 Stepfs lega Disconnecting the Camera For information on disconnecting the camera from the computer see the documentation provided with your camera 219 Macintosh 1 Connect the camera Connect the camera to your computer and turn the camera on I
255. on recorded with the image to au tomatically select an optimal value for Vignette Control Where lens information is not avail able Vignette Control will be based on default lens characteristics To determine whether a given combination of lens and camera will record distance information see the table below Type G or D lens Other lens DI00 D2E Recorded Not recorded D1x D1H firmware version 1 10 or later Recorded Not recorded D1x D1n firmware version 1 01 or earlier Not recorded Not recorded D1 Not recorded Not recorded To use Vignette Control Display the Vignette Control palette Select the tool palette containing the Vignette Control palette from the View menu the default location for the Vignette Control palette is Tool Palette 2 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply Fn Control I Set tings button menu intensity 80 2 Turn the Apply button on A Turn the Apply button on to enable Vignette control Vignette Control The controls in the Vignette Control palette are only available if the image in the active window is a RAW NEF photograph taken with a D1 series D100 or D2H camera If the image in the active window is JPEG or TIFF the Apply button in the Vignette Control palette will be grayed out and inactive Vignette control can not be used to correct vignetting caused by PC Nikkor lenses or Speedlight photography Where Distance Information Is Not Available
256. on will be labeled Start click to start shooting If the selected focus mode is single servo AF an autofocus operation will be performed before the shutter is released Camera Settings That Can Not Be Adjusted from Nikon Capture The following operations can not be performed from Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control operation Camera Nn r D r aa 4 D lt roe paAe dsip Sn e sS 234 Burst photography continuous shooting mode Continuous servo autofocus Pressing the shutter release button halfway to check focus Manual aperture adjustment using the lens aperture ring Reactivating the camera after it has entered sleep mode Depth of field preview Auto bracketing Compression options for NEF RAW images Operation assigned to FUNC button with Custom Setting f4 Focus mode Metering Exposure mode Shooting mode Shutter speed lock Aperture lock Autoexposure lock Speedlight flash level compensation M up mirror up mode selection Selection of second center focus area group in group dynamic AF mode D1 series D100 D1 series D100 D2H D1 series D100 D2H D1 series D2H D1 series D1 series D100 D2H D1 series D100 D2H D100 D2H D1 series D100 D2H D1 series D100 D100 D100 D1 series D2H D1 series D2H D1 series D100 D2H D2H D2H D2H The Exposure 1 Tab The following settings can be adjusted from Nikon Capture Camera Control th e E X 0 osure 1 5 b Fie Camera Settings Tools Help The D2H i
257. only Enter information for City State Province Country Title Object Name Date Cre ated and Transmission Reference IPTC Information m Caption C Picnic Keywords J Recorded Keywords C flowers Categories Category Supplemental Categories flowers Urgency None v Credit Author Nikon Author s Positon Nikon Credit Nikon Source Copyright Notice Nikon City Chiyoda ku Date Created State Province Tokyo 10 1 2003 v County Japan Transmission Reference Title Object Name To save IPTC information in a separate Tile click Save Previously saved information can be loaded by clicking Load 34 Nikon Browser Browsing Pictures after Transfer Nikon Browser is used to browse thumbnail images of the pictures and folders that have been transferred to your computer You can also use the browser to view photo information rotate images or display pictures automated slide shows This chapter is divided into the following sections The Nikon Browser Window This section outlines the controls and displays in the Nikon Browser window and describes how to start and exit Nikon Browser Using Nikon Browser This section details how Nikon Browser can be used to browse files after transfer to manage files by moving them into different folders and organizing folders into favorites to view and print images and how to distribu
258. only used in printing which models color using combinations of the three secondary colors used in printer s ink Cyan Magenta and Yellow Because no combination of these three inks will create a true black blacK ink is also used Color management system A method of ensuring consistency of color reproduction between devices such as scanners monitors and printers and between different computer platforms In the color manage ment system used in Nikon Capture 4 accurate color reproduction is ensured through the use of profiles that provide information about the characteristics of the monitor or printer and the color space used for editing See also ColorSync ICC Profile Color space A general term encompassing both the model used to define color for example CMYK or RGB and the range or gamut of colors that can be expressed in a given color model See also CMYK Gamut RGB ColorSync A color management system for Mac OS developed by Apple See a so Color management system ICC 2 4 CompactFlash memory card A small removable flash memory card Used for storage of photographs in Nikon digital cameras Compression A method for reducing file sizes for storage or transmission Compression algorithms can be divided into lossless algorithms such as LZW in which no information is lost when files are restored to their original size for display or editing and lossy algorithms such as JPEG in which some information
259. opened one at a time in the order taken and separate adjustments made manually for each image 201 This section describes how to use batch processing with files that have already been saved to the computer s hard disk For information on batch processing of images captured directly from the camera see Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 226 Display the Batch dialog Select Batch from the Tools menu or click the gj button to display the Batch dialog Source C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures Include subfolders Source section Periodically check for new files in this Folder Delete files From this Folder after they are processed Image Adjustments O Apply current settings Image Adjustments Apply settings in Browse section Apply settings already in NEF files Destination C Use source folder Use source file name Save to C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures Next file name Img0001 nef Edt Destination section Save as type NEF Nikon Electronic Image Format v Bit Depth 8 bit 16 bit Choose a source folder In the Source section choose the folder containing the images to be processed The cur rent folder is listed in the text box To choose a new folder click the Browse button and navigate to the desired location Include subfolders Check this option to process all images in any sub folders under the specified folder Folders with the same
260. owser C Documents and Settings Wser My Documents My Pictures img0001 File Edit Yiew Image Folder Tools Window Help 6 3 SQ Blo e 20 2Oo SOUS 2 Fi w Shooting Data Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Made sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EV Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Folders 5 My Documents O My Albums O My eBooks f My Music B2 My Pictures Imgo002 Imgo003 New Folder My Received Fil O Pocket_PC My C B My Recent Documer 8 3 NetHood PrintHood O SendTo E Start Menu 1 images selected After specifying the search conditions in the search control click Search All tiles meeting the selected criteria will be displayed in the thumbnail list Nikon Browser Search Results File Edit View Image Folder Tools Window Help gt Shooting Data Search Search Rule By file name By scene mode Off By date Date not specified Capture Date From 10 01 2003 10 01 2003 Folder s to be searched B My Documents Additional settings Search inside of all sub folders C Search only files with tag mark o n Sear
261. p 2 for Nikon Capture 4 Choose the profile created in Step 2 as the Nikon Capture 4 monitor profile For details see Preferences The Color Management Tab AA 211 268 Using an Existing Monitor Profile If you have already calibrated your monitor follow the steps below to select an existing monitor profile Display the Color Settings dialog Select Color Settings from the Adobe Photoshop Edit menu Undo Step Forward OBZ Step Backward 36Z Fade EF Cut EA Copy C Copy Merged EC Paste 3V Paste Into gt EV Clear Fill Stroke Free Transform 38T Transform gt Define Brush Define Pattern Define Custom Shape Purge b Color Settings K Preset Manager Preferences Note the name of the monitor profile Open the RGB pop up menu in the Work Spaces section of the Color Settings dialog The monitor profile will appear to the right of the Monitor RGB entry Note down the name of the profile Color Settings oO Advanced Mode aed Adobe RGB 1998 Apple RGB ColorMatch RGB D SMUG CUOI 700 A I Zi Preview m Color Management Policies RGB Profile Mismatches Y Ask When Opening Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles Ask When Opening gt pa 4 m Description Monitor RGB Sets the RGB working space to your current monitor space This setting causes Photoshop to behave as i
262. p Mask will be applied with the result that only more distinctly contrasting edges will be affected D Create additional masks The controls in the Unsharp Mask palette allow you to select multiple combinations of colors that can be sharpened to different degrees Repeat steps 1 4 to create additional masks for different color combinations As new masks are created they will be added to the end of the Unsharp Mask list Masks apply in the order listed To change the order in which masks apply select a mask in the Unsharp Mask list and click the up arrow to move it up in the list or the down arrow to move it down To delete an Unsharp Mask from the list select it and click the Delete button Unsharp Mask Unsharp Mask sharpens edges without affecting color balance by making adjustments only to lumi nosity brightness The effect is the same as performing Unsharp Mask with the Luminosity channel selected in the Adobe Photoshop Lab color model If Unsharp Mask is applied to a single channel such as red the values for ab chrominance are used to determine what points in the image are red and Unsharp Masking applied to the Luminosity channel for those points only An intensity of around 20 in Nikon Capture 4 is roughly equivalent to 100 in Adobe Photoshop No sharpening will be applied if Intensity is set to zero Intensity must be set to at least 1 if sharpen ing is to apply 182 The Unsharp Mask Settings Menu Clicking the 388 but
263. ported in Nikon Capture 4 to gether with the chromaticity values for the white point and for red green and blue White point Chromaticity x y Color Gamma Profile temperature Value VELTS WELG R G B B x 0 625 0 23 0 155 295 0 Enap foes fo2ss one ee pasa asi fose oan xfo3ia7is51_ TEN Fee ee sRGB 6500K De yfo 32900148 7 CCIR 709 fr oss fos fos a eet NISC x o 67 021 o14 mens Hoa 1953 nee oe oe a y 032900146 7 jy 033 0 65 0 06 _ Adobe RGB 6500K D x0 31271591 27 Adobe a ly 032900148 RGB 1998 y 0 33 0 71 0 06 wa ce gop trina c 033333333 oook p 210 24570282 70 5257 lylo ssas3a6 7 450mm Default Windows 6500K D x 0 31271591 52 HDTV monitor es y 0 32900148 CCIR 709 y 0 33 06 0 06 Default Macintosh 5000K D x 0 34570292 Trinitron monigi y o3s85386 266 Appendix B Color Matching in Adobe Photoshop Version 7 0 or Later When an image saved in Nikon Capture 4 is opened in Adobe Photoshop the profiles used in Adobe Photoshop should match those used in Nikon Capture 4 If the profiles do not match the colors seen in Adobe Photoshop may not be the same as those in the original image The profiles used with Nikon Capture 4 can be used with Adobe Photoshop version 7 0 or later The first step is to match the Nikon Capture 4 monitor profile with that used in Adobe Photo shop Windows only The point to remember is that you should speci
264. pplication icon Windows Turn the computer on Turn the computer on and wait for the operating system to start up Start Nikon Browser From the Start menu select All Programs gt Nikon rercsmvces View 6 gt Nikon View 6 Windows XP Home Edition wecsuecn Windows XP Professional or Programs gt Nikon View 6 gt Nikon View 6 other Windows versions J Nikon Scan 4 E QuickTime gt 9 Startup E Acrobat Reader 5 1 Nikon Capture 4 Adobe Photoshop 7 0 1 Internet Explorer EP Mikon view 6 Help A Nikon View 6 ReadMe s gt Remote Assistance B Nikon View 6 Uninstall Windows Media Player AllPrograms gt I ArcSoft Software Suite Nikon Browser will start Nikon Browser C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures img0001 File Edit View Image Folder Tools Window Help B My Documents My Albums 2 My eBooks My Music My Pictures SEN Img0002 Imgoo03 O New Folder O My Received Fih Pocket_PC My C B My Recent Documer 3 NetHood O PrintHood O SendTo H Start Menu gt 0 images selected Starting Nikon Browser from Nikon Transfer Nikon Browser will be displayed automatically when the Nikon Transfer window closes after transfer Starting Nikon Browser from Nikon Capture 4 Editor Nikon Browser can also be started by selecting Show current folder in Nikon View from the Tools menu in Nikon Capture 4 Editor 38 Getting to Kno
265. ption is not available when Use source folder is selected A folder with the same name will be created in the destination folder Next file name This text box shows a sample of the Tile names that will be used when saving the images after processing To choose a File Naming Prefix Original file name Other Img new file name click the Edit button Suffix Original file name Other The File Naming dialog will be displayed Between Prefix and Suffix Use sequential number For more information see Nikon Trans f er xy 2 7 R Start numbering at E Length of number 4 gt 4 digits Sample ImgQ001 nef Save as type Choose the file format that will be used to save the processed images The following formats are available Use source file type NEF TIFF RGB TIFF CMYK and JPEG When NEF is selected compression can be chosen from a pull down menu When JPEG is selected the compression ratio can be chosen from Highest Compression Ratio Good Compression Ratio Good Balance Good Quality and Excellent Quality For more information on the options available see Saving Images 8 196 Y File Naming Conventions Windows n environments that do not support long file names the maximum length is eight char acters file names may not contain spaces quotes or any of the following characters W 7 ir E UE aL at di oe gt and sl
266. pture 4 Camera Control 231 Follow the progress of time lapse photography in the progress dialog Click Stop Shooting to end time lapse photography at any time If a number of shots was specified in the Time Lapse Photography dialog shooting will end when the specified number of shots has been taken Time Lapse Photography You cannot change settings on the camera when it is in Time Lapse Photography mode Download Folder C My Documents My Pictures 523 8 MB available on this volume Image adjustments Apply camera settings Last image saved C My Pictures Ilmg0002 nef Images saved 2 Interval between shots 00 00 00 Shots attempted 2 of 2 Download Task Ep nloading image Stop Shooting Close the Time Lapse Photography dialog Once the specified number of shots has been taken the Stop Shooting button will change to Shooting Complete Click Shooting Complete to exit the Time Lapse Pho tography dialog Y During Time Lapse Photography The camera can not be operated during time lapse photography No other operations can be per formed until the Time Lapse Photography dialog is closed Auto Off D1 Series Cameras When the camera is operated on battery power and for 15 minutes has been selected for While Nikon Capture Camera Control is running keep camera awake in the General tab of the Preferences dialog A 260 choose a delay of fifteen minutes or less When taking photographs at longer intervals use a
267. r Module Selection Service Choice Nikon net Uploader User Name Nikon1 019 I Don t show this dialog again Password New Member Forgot Password Cancel Click OK to close this dialog and upload the selected images Click Cancel to exit with out uploading the selected images 92 Service Choice Choose Nikon net Uploader to upload images to an on line photo aloum on NikonNet this service is restricted to customers in the USA If you have installed Palm Desk Top and Photobase for Palm you can also choose Photo Base for Palm Sync to upload images to your Palm organizer 84 89 If Active Sync and Photobase for Pocket PC are installed on your computer you can upload images to a Pocket PC using the Photo Base for Pocket PC option 4 89 User Name If you selected Nikon net Uploader from the Service Choice menu enter your NikonNet user name in this text box Don t show this dialog again Check this option to skip the Module Selection dialog the next time you upload images To display the dialog again click Clear in the Publish to NikonNet or PDA tab of the Pref erences dialog A 117 Password If you selected Nikon net Uploader from the Service Choice menu enter your NikonNet password in this text box Remember Password If this option is checked your password will automatically be entered for you the next time the Module Selection dialog is displayed New Member Click to display the NikonNet user regis
268. r Mode Mode I RGB PeT 17 37 08 1 re Mode Programme dAuto AF Mode Manual RAW it Lossles Meteri i Pat Tone Comp Auto e Large 2484x1632 1 60 see Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Nose Reduction OFF sure Lens 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6 D Sensitivity One me of thumbnails at top One fie of thumbnails at side When both Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer are open clicking a thumbnail once in Nikon Browser will display the selected image in Nikon Viewer Viewing the Nikon Browser Toolbar and Navigation Area When Display one line of thumbnails at top or Display one line of thumbnails at side is se lected the selected item is checked and the toolbar and navigation area are hidden To view the toolbar and navigation area select the checked option to cancel the thumbnail only display 63 Creating Large Previews for RAW NEF Images When a large preview 1 600 pixels in the longest dimension is embedded in a RAW NEF photograph taken with a Nikon digital camera the image will scale rapidly to fit in the Viewer window reducing display times To embed large previews in selected RAW NEF images 1 Start the Nikon NEF Preview Creator After selecting one or more RAW NEF images in Nikon Browser click the triangle to the right of the P button and select Large Preview Generator for NEF file or select Large Preview Generator for NEF file from the File gt Edit using other programs menu The following dialog will be displa
269. r card slot that the interface cables are properly connected and the camera is turned on Note that Nikon Transfer will not start automatically when Disable auto launch is selected in the Auto Launch tab of the Nikon Browser or Nikon Viewer Preferences dialog Nikon Transfer will not start when Nikon Cap ture 4 Camera Control is running Captured Images are Too Bright Too Dark Washed Out or Out of Focus e At default settings Nikon Capture 4 does not modify images when they are captured trom the camera In the General tab of the Preferences dialog verify that your images are be ing captured at Nikon Capture s default settings and not at the settings of the last image captured See Preferences for more information Alternatively check the settings in the Curves Color Balance and Unsharp Mask windows Choose the reset option from the Settings menu for each window or turn the Apply button for the window off e Are monitor settings correctly adjusted Try adjusting your monitor s contrast brightness color system etc to be sure that it is properly set for viewing images See the documentation provided with your monitor for instructions on adjusting monitor settings Thumbnails Are Not Displayed in Nikon Browser Check that the folder selected in the folder tree contains images or sound files created by a Supported model of camera Movies Can Not Be Played Back Confirm that you have installed a program for playing movies back
270. r each of the red green and blue elements of the pixel under the cursor and the average of the three weighted according to the properties of human color perception the weighted average is calculated as Redx0 299 Green x0 587 Bluex0 114 Depending on the selected color space the aver age may not reflect the actual luminance of the pixel under the cursor but it can be used as a rough guide to brightness Values for R G B and the average of the three range from O to 255 with values for twelve bit images being scaled to fit in this range The number on the left is the input value or value for the color in the original image The value in the right is the output value or value after any changes in the Curves or Color Adjustment windows have been applied R G B Avg Say coordinates The position of the cursor in the image window measured in pixels from the top left corner of the image Monitoring Watch Points The Intormation palette can be used to continually monitor the red green blue and average values R G B Avg for up to four selected pixels The before input and after output values for each of these pixels will be displayed in the Information palette allowing you to determine the effects of any changes to settings Selecting Watch Points To select a pixel to monitor click the S but paikoissa ton The cursor will change to oF Move P the mouse over the desired pixel and click 20 Th
271. ra displayed Can only be adjust ed in manual and Can only be adjusted in manual exposure shutter priority auto mode exposure modes Exposure Mode Can be selected from Aperture priority auto and Manual Can only be adjusted in manual exposure mode Shutter Speed Aperture shown as f Can not be adjusted AF and Shoot Can not be used If D100 is connected and set to an exposure mode other than manual a warning will be displayed Aperture shown as f Can not be Asterisk appears next adjusted to selected aperture Aperture 241 The Image Processing Tab The following settings can be adjusted from Nikon Capture Camera Control z File Camera Settings Tools Help the Image Processing tab The D2H is connected S h ar p enin g Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded i directly to the computer until this window is closed This option controls how much the camera es sharpens outlines See the camera manual for Enable controls on the camera body details Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Tone Comp This setting controls contrast See the cam Sharpening Auto era manual for details pars aS Color Mode DIX D1 D100 and D2H Hue Adjustment al 9 on ly C Noise Reduction The D100 D1x D1H and D2H offer a choice of color modes See the camera manual for details i 35 BR With the D1 colors are op
272. ransferred Unmarked for protection Only pictures that have not been protected are transferred Hidden images will only be transferred if Copy all images marked as hidden is checked in the Transfer tab of the Transfer options dialog xy 31 If the camera is connected using PTP all images will be transferred regardless of whether Copy all images marked as hidden is selected File Date Pictures can be selected for transfer based on the date of recording Option Description Within amonth Transfer only pictures taken inthe pastmonth When Specify dates is selected clicking the date will display a calendar Select the desired date If User defined is selected sun Mon Tue Wed T the starting From and ending To dates i Ie B can be selected in the same way Today 1021727003 Mac OS X Under Mac OS X files of all types will be transferred regardless of the option selected in the File At tribute menu File Date File dates will not be correct if the camera clock was not set correctly at the time of recording Transferring All Pictures To transfer all pictures on the memory card select Not specified for File Attribute and Date not specified for File Date 28 Transfer Options Clicking the Transfer Options button in the Nikon Transfer window displays the Transfer Options dialog X Nikon Transfer Nikon Transfer options General Transfer Action to perform after transfer St
273. re Camera Control is running keep camera awake The camera stays awake indefinitely Note that this will increase the drain on the bat tery When powered by an AC adapter available separately the camera stays awake indefinitely regardless of the setting chosen using the above option 260 The Temporary Files Tab The Temporary Files tab contains the following item Folder for temporary data Specify the folder or volume in which tem M porary data such as image cache data will be stored The default folder tor Windows is the TEMP folder in the Windows directory while the default volume for the Macintosh is the Start up disk To choose a different folder in the Windows version of the program click the se S Ge ets on this page will be reflected in Nikon Capture Browse button and navigate to the desired location In the Macintosh version a new vol ume can be chosen from the pop up menu General Temporary Files Color Management Folder for temporary data C Documents and Settings User Local Settings Temp The Color Management Tab For more information on the Color Management tab see Nikon Capture 4 Editor Preferences AR 211 Gere Temporary Fies fica General Temporary Files Color Management Note Changes made to items on this page will be reflected in Nikon Capture Editor and Nikon View Note Changes made to items on this page will be reflected in Nikon
274. rea Selection a6 Wrap around disabled vertical AF Button a7 AF ON Focus area Item Custom Setting Activate AF when Shutter Button is pressed half way Focus area Illumination Show Focus Area when Manually Focusing a a5 Show Focus Area when using a Continuous Shooting mode Focus Area Illumination Off Delay a Focus Area Selection a Vertical AF Button a 253 Metering Exposure The Metering Exposure group contains the following settings Custom Settings b Metering Exposure Yv _ 1S0 Auto b1 150 Step Value b2 1 3 EV Step EV Steps for Exposuer Control b3 1 3 EY Step EV Steps For Exposure Compensation b4 1 3 EY Step C Easy Exposure Compenstion b5 Center weighted metering area b6 8 mm diameter Item Custom Setting St tt be Center weighted metering area 254 Timers AE amp AF Lock The Timers AE amp AF Lock group contains the following settings Custom Settings c Timers SERAF Lock Vv C AE Lock when Shutter Button is pressed half way c1 4E LJAF F Button c2 AEAF lock Auto Meter Off Delay c3 6 seconds Self Timer Delay c4 10 seconds LCD Display Auto Power OFF c5 20 seconds Item Custom Setting 255 Shooting Display The Shooting Display group contains the following settings Custom Settings d Shooting Display Contin
275. rer is a product of Microsoft Corporation MMX and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corpo ration Digital DEE is a trademarked technology developed by Applied Science Fiction CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation Photoshop is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc Internet is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trade marks of Netscape Communications Corporation All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Do not play the Nikon Capture 4 installer CD on audio CD equipment Playing a CD ROM on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment Table of Contents Introduction Before YOU BeGiN ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneenesesnaeaeeeseeaeeeeesasaesnessesnseanaeseseeeesees 1 Overview ABOU E This Mantal essiccare E Eea 2 The Five Components of Nikon Capture 4 About This Product ccccccceeeecesesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeas 4 System Requirements What You Need to Run Nikon Capture 4 cccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenesseeeeeeeees 6 E e E E E A EE E E A E T E E gieencagaaeceane Jason 7 Worktlow Using Nik n Capture 4 ssisussssinssr es danedecancvanrnaiadannaec inai aene aKa E eaka EEs 8 Worktow T Feld Photography seeen EE A Eie 8 VOTO 2 wda holai ap essere a E N TEA e 9 Worktlow 3 Batch Processing Existing IM
276. ressed when saved in NEF format compressed RAW images are automatically saved in compressed NEF format and can not be saved in uncompressed NEF format Images saved in NEF format maintain the high quality of the original photograph adjust ments to settings are not applied to the original image data but are instead saved separately in the same file NEF images can later be opened in Nikon Capture and saved again in a format that can be opened in other applications As changes to settings are only applied to the original image data when the image is saved in another format this minimizes any loss of image quality that may be produced when the image is edited Save images in NEF whenever you are unsure of how they will be used or when you want to process the original image in a number of different ways TIFF Use TIFF when saving images for high quality output or publishing Although the lack of compression will result in larger files image quality will be maintained at a high level TIFF also preserves the ICC profile and caption information This format is supported by a wide variety of applications on a variety of platforms JPEG This file type is adequate for images that will be output at low resolution or distributed in electronic form Compression allows more images to be saved in the same amount of disk space while preserving the ICC profile and caption information Note however that JPEG compression results in loss of image informatio
277. ression ree AF and Sho Controls displayed when D2H is connected Choose image size See the camera manual for details RAW Compression D1X D1H D2H Only Check this option to compress NEF RAW images taken at a data format setting of RAW 12 bit JPEG 8 bit D2H only or RAW 12 bit 238 The Mechanical Tab The following settings can be adjusted from the Mechanical tab Nikon Capture Camera Control i Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Settings Tools Help File Camera Image Settings Tools Help The D2H is connected P The D100 is connected Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded dinactiy to the computer until this window bs closed Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options Hide Camera Controls Download Options Enable controls on the camera body Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Shooting Mode Shooting Mode ART AF Area Mode Single 4rea AF Focus Mode Single Servo Focus Mode Single Servo Lens 24 120mm F 3 5 5 6D Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5G Main Battery Level CL T TTT Main Battery Level T T reel Controls displayed when D2H is Controls displayed when D100 is connected connected Shooting Mode Sets the shooting mode for D1 series cameras connected in PC mode to Singl
278. riginal file name Suffix JPEG Sample DSC_OO01JPEG ipa Rename with new numerical sequence Quality settings Choose an image quality JPEG compression ratio using the slider Options range from Low high compression ratio small file size to High low compression ratio large file size The lower the compression ratio the better the quality and the larger the file size Note that the quality of JPEG images can not be increased by saving the copy at a lower compression ratio than the original Click Start to copy the selected images An ICC profile will be embedded in all copies cre ated using this option sRGB If Convert image s to sRGB color space is selected in the Color Management tab of the Nikon Browser Preferences dialog lt 5 112 114 copies will be converted to the sRGB color space lt 5 264 81 Using Nikon Browser Slideshows In Nikon Browser you can view the image files associated with the selected thumbnails as a slideshow Displaying the Slideshow Properties Dialog To view a slideshow select the thumbnails of the image files you want to view in the thumb nail list area then click the Slideshow button in the tool bar or select Slideshow from the Tools menu Slideshow button The slideshow window Is displayed with the Slideshow Properties dialog displayed in front of the slides You can change the slideshow settings using this Slideshow Properties dialog Sli
279. rk S displayed will open the help file to the section that displays the function of the item clicked Windows keyboard shortcuts are listed first Macintosh shortcuts second Show Original Image Data If the image in the active window is a RAW picture taken with a COOLPIX series camera the Show Original Image Data button can not be used 137 Starting Nikon Capture 4 Editor Nikon Capture 4 Editor can be started by selecting Edit from the File menu when thumbnails are selected Nikon Browser or an image is open in Nikon Viewer You can also start the Editor directly by selecting Nikon Capture 4 Editor from the Start menu Windows or double click ing the application icon Macintosh Windows Turn the computer on Turn the computer on and wait for the operating system to start up Start Nikon Capture 4 Editor From the Start menu select All Programs gt Nikon in Capture 4 gt Nikon Capture 4 Editor Windows ronan XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional or a asec Programs gt Nikon Capture 4 gt Nikon Capture 4 Editor other Windows versions amp Nikon Capture Editor DAER Tool Palette 1 File Edit View Settings Tools Help IM E Color Balance f gt El Unsharp Mask IM Z digital DEE gt Size Resolution gt Bird s Eye informa tion Tool Palette 2 gt Wadvanced RAW gt El white Balance gt H noise Reduction gt g Image Dust Off gt Bd vignette Control OX Garner Lens Start
280. rogram Dialog To display the Add Remove editing program dialog se lect Edit using other program gt Add Remove editing program from the File menu or click the triangle to right of the button and select Add Remove editing pro gram from the menu that appears 68 The Add Remove Editing Program Dialog Add Remove editing program Program list lt 3 Nikon Editor Nikon Capture Editor B Photolmpression GF Adobe Photoshop 7 0 a Quick Time Player Gg ideolmpression Es Panorama aker faut o n m Program list The registered programs are displayed in the list Move up Move down Click to move the program selected in the program list up and down This changes the order in which programs displayed when the Edit tool button is clicked or Edit using other programs selected from the File menu Add Click to display the Add Program dialog where you can select and register programs Change Click to display the Change Program dialog where you can change the name of the regis tered programs Delete Click to remove the selected program from the program list Note that the program itself is not deleted 69 70 The Add Program Dialog Add program Hame Nikon Capture Editor Executable file C Program Files Mikon W Capture4 4h Capture exe Name You can assign a name to the program selected in executable file text box The pro gram is added to the program list
281. rowser can be used to transfer images to a Pocket PC if Active Sync and Photobase for Pocket PC were already installed when you installed Nikon View 6 To transfer images e Select Photo Base for Pocket PC from the Service Choice pull down menu in Step 3 of Uploading Images to NikonNet After making sure that your Pocket PC is connected correctly click OK e Use Microsoft Active Sync to transfer the images to your Pocket PC Once transferred images can be viewed on the device s screen You do not need to follow the rest of the steps in the Uploading image files section For instructions on synchronization refer to the documentation provided with your hand held de vice 2 For instructions on installing and using this application refer to the software documentation Hot Sync Hot Sync is a registered trademark of Palm Inc 89 Choose whether to upload images to NikonNet or a hand held device If a hand held device PDA is connected to your computer the Module Selection dialog will be displayed If there are no hand held devices connected to your computer proceed to Step 4 Module Selection Service Choice Nikon net Uploader x User Name Nikont 019 I Don t show this dialog again Password New Member Forgot Password Cancel To upload images to NikonNet select Nikon net Uploader from the Service Choice pull down menu enter your NikonNet user name and password and click OK For more information on transf
282. s connected f Exposure Mode e e aaa Le eaa en This menu can be used to set the exposure mode for D2H and D1 series cameras If the ME AA D100 is connected it will show the current exposure mode but the exposure mode must be selected using the camera function Exposure Mode Programmed Auto Y dial See the camera manual for details U en A Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Aperture i F 3 5 xposure Comp Shutter Speed eee Shutter speed can only be adjusted in Man Flexible Program 9 O E o stents ual and Speed Priority modes when it can be set to values between the maximum and ree minimum values supported by the camera Use high shutter speeds to freeze motion low shutter speeds to suggest motion by Controls displayed when D2H is blurring moving objects connected Aperture Aperture can only be adjusted in Manual and Aperture Priority modes when it can be set to values between maximum and minimum aperture small apertures have high t numbers wide apertures low f numbers the actual apertures available depend on the lens used Ap erture can not be controlled from Nikon Capture when Custom Setting 22 A 251 has been set to allow aperture to be adjusted manually using the lens aperture ring D1 series only Exposure Comp Exposure compensation is useful when shooting subjects containing sharp lighting contrasts or on other occasions when you want
283. s in the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control window as well as for information on launching and closing the Camera Control window capturing photographs to disk processing photo graphs as they are captured time lapse photography and custom settings Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Preferences This section details the options available in the Camera Con trol Preferences dialog 215 The Camera Control Window Getting to Know Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control The main parts of the Camera Control window are identified below For more information see the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Window 233 Connection status 84 233 Shows the status and name of any cameras connected Nikon Capture Camera Control AE Download Options button Click this button to choose a destination for Fie Camera Settings Tools Help The D2H is connected photographs captured from the camera Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer until this window is closed Hide Camera Controls Download Options Enable controls on the camera body Camera control page selection tabs The menus sliders and buttons on each tab are used to control camera settings Exposure 1 Exposure 2 Storage Mechanical Image Processing Exposure Mode Programmed Auto i Shutter Speed i m 1 5 sec Aperture i FI3 5 Exposure Comp 4 0 gt oey Flash Comp 4A
284. sable Shutter Button if no CF Card is present D1x D1H File number sequence Rear Control Panel Display D1x D1H 250 The Page 3 Tab The Page 3 tab contains the following settings Custom Settings Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 C Change aperture setting via lens aperture ring 22 Auto meter off delay 15 6 seconds Self Timer delay 16 110 seconds Aperture control during zoom 19 AE L AF L Button 21 AE AF lock Continuous Mode shooting speed 25 3 Frames Second Continuous Mode max shots 26 4 Item Camera Custom Setting Fora uto meter o elay D100 D100 Self timer delay EV steps for exposure control Aperture control during zoom D1 series Flash mode Continuous mode shooting speed D1 series Continuous mode max shots D1 series l D1 series_ AE L AF L button Drea Dt series_ 251 Custom Settings for D2H Cameras The D2H allows a descriptive comment to be added to the name of each Custom Settings bank Clicking Edit displays the dialog shown at right where the O comments for each bank can be edited After enter ing descriptive comments of up to twenty characters each click OK to copy the comments to the camera Edit Custom Settings Comment Ed Custom Settings in each bank are divided into six groups autofocus metering exposure timers autoexposure and autofocus lock shooting display bracketing flash and controls The group can be chosen fr
285. sary of terms Before using Nikon Capture 4 you should know how Nikon Capture fits into your particular workflow and what components and functions you will need You can then refer to the chapters on the relevant functions as needed to complete each task Symbols and Conventions The following symbols and conventions are used in this manual This icon marks cautions information that This icon marks notes information that you 7 you should read before use to prevent pos should read before using this software sible damage to your camera or computer This icon marks tips additional information This icon indicates that more information is you may find helpful when using this soft available elsewhere in this manual ware Menu items and button names are shown in bold Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education con tinually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania the Middle East and Africa http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional infor mation may be available from the Nikon representative in your area 2 Background
286. selecting Noise EE Reduction from the Settings menu Image Adjustments gt White Balance Advanced RAW Vignette Control b gt Noise Reduction Copy to Clipboard Curves gt Load gt gt Color Balance b Save Unsharp Mask Reset to Neutral Size Resolution p 185 Digital DEE Digital DEE Dynamic Exposure Extender reveals details in shadows and highlights correct ing tor underexposure in back lit subjects or shaded areas of images and for overexposure in brightly lit areas 2 Display the Digital DEE palette Select the tool palette containing the Digital DEE palette trom the View menu the de fault location for the Digital DEE palette is Tool Palette 1 and click the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply button E B Digital DEE AO Settings menu Shadow adjustment 4 j gt Turn the Apply button on A Turn the Apply button on to enable Digital DEE Adjust settings Enhancing Details in Shadows To enhance details in shadows adjust shadow brightness using the Shadow adjust ment slider or by entering a value between 1 and 100 in the text box to its right The larger the value the brighter shadows in the image will be The default setting is 20 E Digital DEE Shadow adjustment Shadow adjustment ___ gt slider and text box The effects of changes to shadow brightness will be visible in the image in the active window s
287. ser is selected for When a new image is received from the camera in the Download Options dialog photo graphs will be opened in Nikon Viewer or Nikon Browser as they are taken Exit Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control To exit Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control click the close button in the title bar of the Nikon Capture Camera Control window The Minimize Button Windows Mac OS X Clicking the minimize button in the progress dialog minimizes Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control 225 Processing Photographs as They Are Captured As photographs are captured Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control can automatically process the images to reflect image adjustment settings in Nikon Capture 4 Editor For information on performing batch processing on images that have already been saved to disk see Batch Processing 84 201 Select Live Batch from the Camera menu Open the Live Batch dialog 2d M Choose how photographs will be processed 227 Choose the folder that will be used to store the photographs 228 Choose a naming method and file format for captured photographs 228 Choose whether to save unmodified photo graphs separately 229 Click Start 229 Open the batch progress dialog Take photographs 229 Finish shooting Click Stop Batch to exit the Live Batch dialog Ci aeea buen e Live Batch Processing Live batch processing is used to perform the operations specified in the Image Adjustments section of the Live Batch dialog
288. sible when the button in the Quick Tools palette is clicked to open an image in Photoshop 137 If sixteen bit transfer is not possible when Transfers 16 bit data when possible is selected images will be transferred eight bits at a time File format for Save As Choose the default file format for images saved using the Save As option 197 Choose from Same as original file each image will be saved in its current format Previ ous file format images will be saved in the last format selected NEF JPEG TIFF RGB and TIFF CMYK By default a D1X RAW file will be This option controls the default size for RAW images taken with the D1x Choose 10MP 4016 x 2616 or 6MP 3008 x 1960 Opening Files with Photoshop Mac OS 9 A temporary file is created each time an image is opened in Photoshop These files are normally deleted when the computer restarts In Mac OS 9 however the files are locked and cannot be deleted instead they are moved to the Trash To delete files select Empty Trash from the Special menu in the Finder while pressing the option key 208 The Temporary Files Tab The Temporary Files tab offers the following option Folder for temporary data Specify the folder or volume in which tem porary data such as image cache data will be stored The default folder tor Windows is the TEMP folder in the Windows di rectory while the default volume for the Macintosh is the start up disk To choose a dif
289. st 36 41 51 Thumbnails tab 106 107 TIFF 141 196 199 278 Time lapse photography 230 232 Title bar 36 120 136 Tone compensation 160 242 Toolbar 36 37 120 121 Tool palettes 136 150 152 U Unsharp mask 152 181 183 278 Unsharp Mask palette 152 181 183 V Vignette control 152 166 167 W Web options 89 97 White balance 152 153 158 237 279 fine tuning 237 White Balance palette 152 153 158 White point 171 173 279 X x y coordinates 146 Z Zoom 125 126 Zoom ratio 125 281 Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION NIKON CORPORATION ovimted in rinted in Japan Fuji Bldg 2 3 Marunouchi 3 chome SB3K00850201 11 Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8331 Japan 6MSA5711
290. svosivanvesisnnnesseonaavdoonmlivadetintrataduevavsevinsTeawbsndewsswsaaivelaranubens 104 The Auto Laici T rai gcc ict nbc E E tr EE E E A E 105 The CAMPANAS TaD acerca eannan Eae ana AEEA SEE EATE ENEE EEOSE 106 ee E E a EE EE E A E E EA ATA EE 108 The MOVE Ti iaire nen aa EA E E a E TE EAE EEE E bene 109 The Sound Tab Windows ONIY o icircirnrrniiriieirininiriniaeii iana AENA ENET 111 The Color Management Tab Windows vsceicsiec vane deccssaviocndacvenddedostnivanadewtedvauiaststemey ivewsasdestwecaatien 112 The Color Management Tab Macintosh sass icincstnasosdensasdiesssslivnenetaensnayeuseuiavneaiennasdludvawsiieesdansantieas 114 The Publish to NikonNet or PDA Tab Americas Only sesssinnessnninneessiininrssrirrresssrrrrrnrrrrrrreennn 117 Nikon Viewer Viewing PiCtUrEs sccisacsssicissancissransneishianednuansunstaveasinexdandenensiavaxsdsadendeatnenmenstmduessienduaens 119 The Nikon Viewer Window Getting to Know Nikon Viewer ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 Starting Nikon VIEWeT essiensa nan iaae AA iA ERA EEA ENERE 122 Exiting NIKON VISWET sersansrean aii Ea Raai E Oi 123 Using Nikon Viewer Taking a Closer LOOK scicccscscsssacsadancatesnestecdensacancedvatsaneadeuacesmerndcestsvaterseerin 124 Viewing the Entire Mage wuii sisaita sdnancontiiindats sduwadsaosdteuswbiin dina ditanenaueduinshdonednumenshiendaadnneddw EEAS 125 ZOOMING imagen and QU csa aA EA ATEA E EEA 125 Fanno Mage FIE arera AS EEA E A AAE SA
291. t RAW F 1 4 images selected 5 6MB 1600 x 120 Status bar Other Ways to View Images You can also open an image in Nikon Viewer by e selecting its thumbnail and clicking the View button on the toolbar or selecting View from the File menu e selecting its thumbnail and pressing the ENTER key Windows or the RETURN key Macintosh 61 Displaying Images in Nikon Viewer Images opened in Nikon Viewer can only be displayed one at atime If multiple thumbnails are opened only one image will be displayed Use the Next Image Selected and Previous Image Selected buttons to display the other images You can use the Nikon Viewer status bar to check the number of opened images and the Status of the currently displayed image 2 5 images selected 9 5MB 3008 x 2000 You can view other images using the Next Image Selected and Previous Image Selected buttons in the Nikon Viewer toolbar Previous Image Selected button Next Image Selected button In Windows even If you open only one thumbnail in the thumbnail list area you can browse through all the still images stored in the same folder as the selected image by using the Next Image Selected and Previous Image Selected buttons Image Editing Programs To edit a still image select its thumbnail and click the Edit button in the toolbar or select Edit from the File menu This will launch the image editing program selected in the Still image tab xy 108 of t
292. t Destination section Save as type NEF Nikon Electronic Image Format Bit Depth bit 16 bit Archive C Save unmodified files Archive section Specify how captured images will be processed In the Image Adjustments section specify the operations to be performed on each im age Apply settings written by the camera Select this option to save images exactly as captured from the camera without applying any of the modifications in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor tool palettes The image will be saved in the working output color space selected in the Color Management tab of the Preferences dialog 84 211 213 Apply current settings from Nikon Capture Editor Select this option to process images using the settings currently in effect in Nikon Capture 4 Editor This option is only available when Nikon Capture 4 Editor is running To open Nikon Capture 4 Editor and adjust settings click the Launch Nikon Capture Editor button Apply settings in Select this option to process the images using combination settings created using the Save option in the Nikon Capture 4 Editor Settings gt Image Adjustment menu amp 195 Click Browse to select a combination settings file 227 Choose a destination for captured images In the Destination section choose options for saving the processed images Save to This text box shows the folder to which the images will be saved after processing To choose a new folder click
293. te images by e mail or upload them to the Web Nikon Browser Preferences Read this section for information on fine tuning settings for Nikon Browser and Nikon Viewer 35 The Nikon Browser Window Getting to Know Nikon Browser The main parts of the Nikon Browser window are identified below Menu bar Contains commands for a variety of browser operations Title bar Displays the name of the current folder Nikon Browser C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures img0001 File Edit View Image Folder Tools Window Help 6 S SO BO Su VO D eea SIF y Shooting Data Toolbar Contains the buttons listed in the table opposite Shooting data area Displays photo information for picture currently selected in the thumbnail list 55 Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Sync Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EW Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment 4 My Documents O My Albums My eBooks 2 My Music BA My Pictures OG Imgoo02 Imgoo03 O New Folder O My Received Fih Pocket_PC My C B My Recent Documer NetHood PrintHood Thumbnail
294. th Open saved images with Choose J SOA C Program Files Adobe Photoshop 7 0 Photoshop exe L n _ Save large previews for NEF files C Save large previews for NEF Files Use this monitor for new images Apple Studio Display Hide Tool Palettes when the application is not active Initial image window size 1 2 of the screen width H C Show full path in the image window title bar A f nee Open with Photoshop Quick Tools Button Transfers 16 bit data when possible iz Open with Photoshop Quick Tools button Transfers 16 bit data when possible File Format for Save As Same as original file iy File Format for Save As Same as original file By default a D1X RAW file will be GMP 3008 x 1960 i By default a D1X RAW File will be emp 3008 x 1960 y L X C Help Cancel Windows Macintosh User Default image adjustments Choose the combined settings set file that will apply when Reset to User Default is selected from the Settings gt Image Adjustments menu A 195 The factory default set tings Tile Neutral set produces a neutral unedited image Open saved image with To specify the application used to open saved images click the Browse button and nav igate to the desired application This setting has no effect on the Open in Photoshop button in the Quick Tools palette 137
295. th your camera Warnings If you perform the following actions when Nikon Transfer is running a warning will be displayed Click OK to exit Nikon Transfer The following warning will be displayed if you disconnect the camera or card reader or turn the camera off while Nikon Transfer is running Nikon Transfer x There is no memory card in the connected camera or the card reader The following warning will be displayed if you remove the memory card from the card reader or card slot while Nikon Transfer is running Nikon Transfer X Card has been ejected 17 Restarting Nikon Transfer How you can restart Nikon Transfer after exiting depends on whether the camera is still con nected and powered on and or the memory card still inserted in the camera card reader or PC card slot If the camera is still connected and or the memory card in place 1 Start Nikon Browser X 38 Nikon Browser C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures lmg0001 File Edit View Image Folder Tools Window Help tt MTE J Cl O BE Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Made sRGB 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 apa Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec 73 5 Flash Site Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp 0 EY Lens 24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 2
296. the Advanced Raw palette will be grayed out and inactive 159 Tone Comp Adjust image contrast Choose from Unchanged Less Contrast Normal More Con trast or User Defined Custom Curve Because the D1 does not store custom curves in the image file settings of User Defined Custom Curve and Unchanged are equiv alent to Normal when selected with photographs taken with the D1 With the D100 D1x D1H and D2H selecting Unchanged restores the tone curve in effect at the time the photograph was taken Color Mode Choose a color mode for fine control over chroma brightness and color gamut much as you would choose different kinds of color film for different scenes Choose trom Un changed Mode sRGB Mode II Adobe RGB or Mode III SRGB In the case of images taken with the D1 Unchanged is equivalent to D1 Mode NTSC Color mode selection is available only in the case of RAW images taken with D1 series D100 or D2H cameras Hue Adjustment Adjusts hue without affecting brightness or saturation Hue can be adjusted in the range 9 to 9 in seven steps of 3 If red is taken as the starting color raising hue above 0 the default setting at which hue is unchanged would introduce a yellow cast making colors that would be red at a setting of 0 appear increasingly orange Lowering hue below 0 would introduce a blue cast making colors that would be red at a setting of 0 appear increasingly purple in the case of the D1x and
297. the folder tree E My Documents oo My Albums My eBooks My Music My Pictures e Pocket_PC My Do SF My Recent Document 42 NetHood PrintHood Drag and drop Le Windows Macintosh Move a file to another location on Copy a file to another location on Press the CTRL key while drag Press the option key while drag the same drive ging the file ging the file Move a file to another drive oo HUF sey while drag ging the Tile Copy a file to another drive Use drag and drop Use drag and drop NEF JPEG Images with Voice Memos D2H Only If a voice memo has been recorded for an NEF4 JPEG image moving either the JPEG or NEF file will also move the associated voice memo and delete the link between the sound file and the remaining file 44 Using the Move and Copy Options These options can be used to move copy or rename selected files a and folders Select one or more items in the thumbnail list and select View Move in the File menu to display the Move file s dialog or SF emod g Copy to display the Copy file s dialog rane for fl Copy Move file s Copy file s Move selected file s to the destination folder Copy selected file s to the destination folder Destination folder Destination folder B ocuments and Settings User My Documents My Pictures YW B ocuments and Settings User My Documents My Pictures YW C Rename file s C Rename file s
298. the triangle at the top left corner of the palette Apply a v Unsharp Mask Delete button a Up down arrows Unsharp mask list Color Color m Warning button Intensity 4 j Ec EE 6 Halo width gt Oey Threshold gt levels Y The Warning Button A warning button appears if the image in the active window is displayed at a zoom ratio too low to al low the effects of Unsharp Mask to be displayed Click the button to view the warning 181 Create an Unsharp Mask Unsharp Mask can be applied to all the colors in the image or selectively to any combi nation of red green and blue channels Select a combination of colors from the color pop up menu The Unsharp Mask you create will be applied only to edges in the selected colors A Select values for intensity halo width and threshold Intensity The amount the contrast of edges will be increased Too great an intensity will degrade your image rather than sharpening it Halo Width The size of the areas that will be affected The greater the halo width the wider the edges in the sharpened image will appear Too large a value for halo width will produce a halo along edges in the image Threshold The limit at which sharpening will be applied If the threshold is zero sharpening will apply to all pixels in the image Increasing the threshold increases the amount of contrast that must be present between pixels before Unshar
299. this is checked Nikon View will re create thumbnails from high quality original images This will result in higher quality thumbnails however it will slow the download Cache On Changes will take effect after restarting Nikon View Cache folder C Documents and Settings User 4pplication Data Nikon Nikon Wiews Thumb Maximum cache size l ee The Delete button removes all cached thumbnails but it does not delete your pictures Windows Preferences General Auto launch Hi Still image Movie Color Management Publish to NikonNet or PDA C Re create thumbnails from actual image data When this is checked Nikon View will re create thumbnails from high quality original images This will result in higher quality thumbnails however it will slow the download v Thumbnail cache on Takes effect immediately Maximum cache size Om f 10 MB The Delete button removes all cached thumbnails but it does not delete your pictures Macintosh 106 Create Re create thumbnails from actual image data Check this option to create a high resolution thumbnail from an image file and display the thumbnail in the Nikon Browser thumbnail list Note that this will increase the amount of time needed to display thumbnails If this option is not selected there will be some cases when the operating system s generic file icons appear in the thumbnail list area instead o
300. timized for the NTSC color space regardless of the option chosen for color mode Controls displayed when D2H is connected Hue Adjustment D1x D1 D100 and D2H only Use to modify hue while leaving brightness and chroma unaffected Adjustments can be made in the range 9 to 9 with 0 representing the original hues as recorded by the cam era in D1 series cameras 9 is equivalent to a camera hue setting of 0 0 to a setting of 3 and 9 to a setting of 6 Noise Reduction D100 and D2H only At shutter speeds slower than 2s noise in the form of randomly spaced brightly colored pixels may appear in photographs particularly in shadows Check Noise Reduction to reduce noise Saving and Loading Camera Control Settings The Camera Control option in the Settings menu is used to save Nikon Capture 4 Cam era Control settings and to load and apply previously saved settings Select this item to load camera settings previously saved using the Save Camera Set tings option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension ncc will be displayed The settings in the Camera Control window will instantly revert to the saved settings Settings Load Camera Settings Save Camera Settings Load Camera Settings Select this item to save the settings in the Camera Control window to a n
301. tings as necessary The Noise Reduction Settings Menu Clicking the IE button in the Noise Reduction palette displays the Noise Reduction Set tings menu erg Copy to Clipboard Load Save E H noise Reduction Edge Moise Reduction a z Reset to Neutral Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Noise Reduction settings to the clipboard Select this item to load Noise Reduction settings previously saved using the Save option see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate Load to the drive volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension nnr will be displayed The settings in the Noise Reduction palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save Noise Reduction settings to anamed file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Noise Reduc Ww tion settings Noise Reduction settings are saved with the extension nnr Reset to Neutral Resets Noise Reduction settings to their default values Recent Noise Reduction settings files up to four are listed at the end of the Recent files settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Noise Reduction palette to the saved settings Save The Settings Menu The Noise Reduction Settings menu can also be displayed by
302. tion window Windows only Image area Shows the image currently being edited The Menu Bar and Quick Tools t Flash Sync Mode Not Attached DER Tool Palette 1 EJ ee I curves I E color Balance gt Unsharp Mask F Z digital DEE D gt JE ik k DA Color If ode Size Resolution E Hue Adjustm Sharpening Noise Reducl Image Cornrr J gt Tool palettes These palettes are used for image en hancement 150 4 Ae Tool Palette 2 gt Hl advance d RAW gt White Balance gt Noise Reduction gt El image Dust Off gt Pd vignette Control gt Fisheye Lens E DE E E JE E ai p 99 9 D if Image window Displays images cur rently opened for ed iting Any number of image windows can be open simultaneously Although many operations can be performed using both menu commands and the buttons in the Quick Tools palette the explanations in this manual give priority to operations performed using tool buttons Hiding the Tool Palettes and Quick Tools Palette Press tab to hide or display the tools and Quick Tools palettes 136 Quick Tools The Quick Tools palette contains buttons that replicate commonly used menu commands Button NETS Function Shortcut x AS Ctrl 0 B om Click to open an image file for editing Save Save changes to the image in the active image Ctrl S 196 window cmd S E Copy Imag
303. tle for subsequent photographs If the camera currently connected is in the D1 series enter a title of thirty eight characters or less and click OK The title will be used for all subsequent photographs taken while the camera Is connected When a D100 or D2H camera is connected the title is stored in the camera as an image comment of thirty six characters or less which is appended to photographs only when the Attach comment to images box is checked Select Shooting Settings Bank D100 and D2H only Selecting this option displays the dialog shown at right where you can choose the shooting menu bank in which changes to settings will be stored while the camera Is con trolled from Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control See the camera manual for details The D2H allows a descriptive comment to be added to the name of each shooting menu bank Clicking Edit displays the dialog shown at right where the comments for each bank can be edited After entering descriptive comments of up to twenty characters each click OK to copy the comments to the camera Live Batch Selecting this option opens the Live Batch dialog 226 Time Lapse Photography Edit Image Comment x fo D1 series Edit Image Comment LI Attach comment to images D100 D2H Select Shooting Settings Bank fx Shooting settings will be read From and written to D100 Select Shooting Settings Bank Shooting settings will be read from and wr
304. to modify the exposure value determined by the cam era Exposure compensation is available in all exposure modes Flash Comp D100 only This option is used to adjust the level of the D100 s built in Speedlight Flexible Program Flexible program can only be used in Program Mode when it allows you to choose from predetermined combinations of shutter soeed and aperture appropriate to current lighting conditions The Function Dial D100 Digital Cameras Only The D100 can only be used to take photographs when the function dial is set to P S A or M At other settings the controls in the Exposure 1 tab will be disabled Non CPU Lenses See page 241 for information on the settings available with non CPU lenses SJ Bulb At a shutter soeed of Bulb the shutter remains while the shutter release button is held down Use the camera shutter release button to take photos at this setting Clicking either of the shoot buttons will display an error message 235 The Exposure 2 Tab The following settings can be adjusted from the Exposure 2 tab See the camera manual for details Nikon Capture Camera Control m Nikon Capture Camera Control File Camera Settings Tools Help File Camera Image Settings Tools Help The D2H is connected Px The D100 is connected Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF card and be downloaded directly to the computer unl this window Is dosed Images captured by this camera will bypass the CF car
305. ton in the Unsharp Mask palette displays the Unsharp Mask Settings menu Copy to Clipboard Load Save Reset to Neutral Color Intensity Halo Width Threshold Option Description Copy to Clipboard Copy current Unsharp Mask settings to the clipboard Select this item to load Unsharp Masks previously saved using the Save op tion see below A dialog will be displayed where you can navigate to the drive Load volume and directory containing the desired settings file only files with the extension num will be displayed The settings in the Unsharp Mask palette will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save Unsharp Mask settings to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dia log where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Unsharp Ww Mask settings Unsharp Mask settings are saved with the extension num Reset to Neutral Deletes all Unsharp Masks currently displayed in the Unsharp Mask palette Recent Unsharp Mask settings files up to four are listed at the end of the Recent files settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Unsharp Mask palette to the saved settings Save The Settings Menu The Unsharp Mask Settings menu can also be displayed by selecting Unsharp Mask from the Settings menu Image Adjustments gt White Balance
306. tration page in your Web browser If you are not yet a member click this button to register Forgot Password Click to display the NikonNet password assistance page in your Web browser If you for get your password click this button and supply the necessary information 93 94 The Upload Preview Dialog In the Upload Preview dialog you can resize the images uploaded to the album and add a caption keywords and description NikonNet Publishing Preview Caption Sunflower Keywords picnic Description Common options for all images Image Size Keep the orginal si wt Nae a Don t show this dialog again Images will not be enlarged Low Quality High Small File Size Laroe C Use IFTE Information When multiple images are selected for upload you can use the Next and Previous buttons under the preview to display additional images Click OK to close this dialog and upload the selected images at the specified settings Click Cancel to exit without uploading the selected images Caption Enter a caption for the image currently displayed in the preview area The caption will appear in the on line album Keyword Enter keywords for the image currently displayed in the preview area The keywords will appear in the My Pictures section Description Enter a description for the image currently displayed in the preview area The description will appear in the on line album Don t show this dialog again Check t
307. trolled by a midpoint slider at the bottom of the curve edit display Moving the midpoint slider to the left increases the brightness of mid tones without washing out highlights Moving the slider to the right darkens mid tones without obliterating detail in shadows The midpoint can be set using the midpoint slider or by directly sampling the image using the midpoint eyedropper tool 1 00 255 51 Output 151 Midpoint slider The Midpoint Slider The midpoint slider is located at the bottom of the curve edit display After clicking the slider once to activate it move it to the left to increase the brightness of mid tones in the selected channel or move it to the right to decrease brightness Alterna tively you can enter a value for gamma directly in the text box under the slider The effects of changes to the midpoint can be seen in the active image Q Gamma Gamma also written y is a fundamental property of video systems which determines the intensity of the output signal relative to the input When calculating gamma the maximum possible input in tensity is assigned a value of one and the minimum possible intensity no input is assigned a value of zero Output is calculated by raising input to a power that is the inverse of the gamma value output input In practical terms raising the gamma value has the same effect as moving the midpoint slider to the left raising mid tone output values and brightening the im
308. tured images D1 series D100 only The options in the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control Image menu can be used to rotate cap tured images according to camera orientation Use these options when taking photographs in tall portrait orientation Select an option once to enable it again to disable it Rotate all downloaded images by 90 degrees CCW If this option is checked images will be rotated 90 counterclockwise as they are saved Rotate all downloaded images by 90 degrees CW If this option is checked images will be rotated 90 clockwise as they are saved View Captured Image Immediately If View captured image immediately is not checked in the Nikon Browser View menu when View with Nikon Viewer or Show it with the Nikon Browser is selected the destination folder must be opened manually using the Transfer Destination button If View captured image immediately is not checked in the Nikon Viewer View menu when View with Nikon Viewer is selected captured images can be displayed by clicking the Next Image Selected button Macintosh only Auto Image Rotation D2H Only If On the default setting is selected for Auto image rotation in the camera setup menu the D2H will detect camera orientation and automatically rotate photographs as they are taken note that in continuous mode the rotation applied to the first image in each burst applies to all images in the series even if camera orientation is changed during shooting
309. ty five pictures printed in five rows of Twenty five pictures printed in five rows of five columns each five columns each 5x 8Up Forty pictures printed in eight rows of five Forty pictures printed in five rows of eight columns each columns each Image Print page consisting solely of the following information for the selected images file information name camera make and model exposure program date and time of creation shutter list speed aperture and white balance The size of the images is automatically adjusted according to the layout Select Rotate imag es to fit to rotate images to print at the largest size that will fit on the selected paper size Select picture size When this option is selected you can choose oE ET print size from a drop down list H x ou valet 23 Zip disk case 3 8 3 3 CD casei xg r Rotate image s to fit Check this option to automatically rotate each image so as to minimize the unused space inside each image frame Print a picture multiple times To print multiple copies of each image check this option and select a number from between two and ten from the pull down menu Select The whole page to print enough copies of the image to fill the whole page at the selected size Borderless print Windows Eliminate white border Macintosh Check this option to adjust the image size so that it fits exactly inside the red border without leaving any white space If the aspect ratio of the box a
310. ue can also be entered directly in the text box underneath the Slider Matching the black point slider with the lowest input value displayed in the histo gram will set the minimum output value for the selected channel to the darkest pixel actually present in the image steepening the curve and enhancing contrast without sacrificing detail in shadows Similarly matching the white point slider with the highest input value displayed in the histogram will set the maximum output value for the selected channel to the bright est pixel present in the image enhancing contrast without loss of detail in highlights Any changes are applied instantly to the active image Black point slider White point slider Id o 1 00 255 Input 151 Output 151 172 Sampling the Image for White Point or Black Point The white point or black point can be set by directly sampling the image allowing you to choose the pixels that will be used to set the maximum white point or minimum black point output value This makes it possible to set the black point by matching it to a pixel in the darkest part of the image containing detail you want to preserve eliminating details in darker areas that are not important to the final image Similarly you can match the white point to a pixel in the brightest area of the image containing details important to the final im age While direct sampling can be used with any channel it is most effective when used with the master c
311. uit Nikon Capture Editor Windows Mac OS 9 Mac OS X LQ The Preferences dialog contains the following five tabs Tab Description o the default image enhancement options that will apply to new 507 Temporary Files Specify the location of the folders used for temporary storage Advanced Color Set the defaults for the white and black points in the Curves window 1 Specify the spacing and color of the grid displayed in image windows 211 Select the color profiles used by the Nikon Color Management System 211 Color Management CMS 213 After making changes to preferences click OK to save changes and return to the Nikon Capture 4 Editor window Click Cancel to cancel any changes to settings and return to the Nikon Capture 4 Editor window Viewing Preferences To view settings in any of the five panels click the appropriate tab Tab General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management 206 The General Tab The General tab contains the following items Options Preferences f General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management General Temporary Files Advanced Color Grid Lines Color Management User Default image adjustments Macintosh HD Library Applicatio Nikon Runtime Files Neutral set 4 Choose X us User Default image adjustments C Program Files Nikon NCapture4 Neutral set Open saved images wi
312. uous Mode Shooting Speed d1 3 Frames Second v Continuous Mode Max Shots d2 4 40 C Exposure Delay d3 C Noise Reduction d4 C Auto File Numbering Mode d5 Control Panel Finder d6 Rear Control Panel Display 150 Sensitivity Image Counter Frame count _ Always use LCD illumination d7 Item Custom Setting Control Panel Finder Rear Control Panel Display Image Counter Always use LCD illumination 256 Bracketing Flash The Bracketing Flash group contains the following settings Custom Settings te Bracketing Flash v Flash Sync Speed e1 1 250 second Slow Shutter Limit with Flash e2 1 60 second External Flash interlock with Aperture e3 Activate Modeling when Preview Button is pressed e4 4E WB Flash Bracketing e5 AE amp Flash Change Factor in Manual Mode e6 D TTL Exposure time Bracketing order e7 Metered gt Under gt Over Dials used for Setting Bracketing e8 Main amp Sub Cancel Item Custom Setting Change Factor in Manual Mode e6 Dials used for Setting Bracketing e8 257 Controls The Controls group contains the following settings Custom Settings F Controls v Center Button F1 Center Button on Shooting Center AF area Center Button on Playback Thumbnail on off Zoom Ratio 2 200m Multi Sel
313. up or down in the Favorites list The folders in the Folder gt Favorites sub menu will be displayed in the specified order Add Click to display the Add to Favorites dialog where you can add folders to your favorites Change Click to display the Change Favorites dialog where you can change the name under which folders are listed in the Favorites list without changing the name of the original folder Name Birthday Party Change Favorites Folder location C Documents and Settings U enMy Documents Delete Click to remove the selected folder from your list of favorites The original folder is not de leted from your computer 47 Working with Thumbnails The thumbnail list area displays thumbnails for all images stored in the selected folder Nikon Browser C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures img mS Fie Edit view Image Folder Tools Window Help AAAA TA w Shooting Data Nikon D2H Focal Length 24mm White Balance Auto Color Mode Mode sRG 2003 10 01 17 37 08 1 Exposure Mode Manual AF Mode AF S Hue Adjustment 0 RAW 12 bit Lossless Metering Mode Multi Pattern Tone Comp Auto Sharpening Auto Image Size Large 2464 x 1632 1 160 sec f 3 5 Flash Syne Mode Not Attached Noise Reduction OFF Exposure Comp OEY Lens 24 85mm 3 5 4 5 G Sensitivity ISO 200 Image Comment Folders x A B My Documents O My Albums O My eBooks 2 My Music My Pictures Imgooo1 O
314. urve When the master curve is selected sampling will set the white or black point for red green and blue curves simultaneously the master curve Itself is unaffected To sample the white point click the White Point button Bj When the cursor is moved over the active image it will take the shape of an eyedropper Move the cursor over the image to tind the pixel that you want to use to set the white point keeping an eye on pixel level display in the Information palette to identify pixels with high input values With the cursor over the target pixel click the mouse button The input value for the selected pixel will be used as the input value for the white point The cursor will return to its original shape and the image will automatically be altered to reflect the new value for white point To sample the image for the black point click the Black Point button and move the eyedropper cursor over the image until you find the point that you want to use to set the minimum input value then click the mouse button to select the black point Setting the White Point or Black Point for the Current Channel By default sampling sets the white point or black point for all channels and displays the master chan nel To set the white point midpoint or black point for the current channel only sample the image while holding down the Ctrl key Windows or option key Macintosh on the keyboard Note that midpoint can not be sampled for a single channel regard
315. using the folder hierarchy and folder names e g 100ND100 used on the camera memory card Subfolders If this option is not checked all images will be transferred to the same folder When this option is checked a new folder will be created for each transfer making it easier to keep track of photographs Panorama Assist Ultra HS COOLPIX Cameras If you are using a Nikon camera equipped with a Panorama Assist scene mode or a Continuous setting of Ultra HS be sure to check Copy folder names from camera before transferring pictures to ensure that each sequence of pictures taken at these settings will be transferred a separate folder on the computer These folders will appear as sub folders in the Nikon Browser thumbnail list and folder view Thumbnail list Folder view jon o jon o on Folders x gt wi Desktop Folder 7 Documents F i ImgO001 CL 100NIKON Gi 101P_001 TOONIKON I 102N_001 Other Panorama Ultra HS pictures Assist 25 Sub Folder Naming Clicking Change in the Folder area displays the Eem Sub Folder Naming dialog Prefix Nikon Folder names consist of a prefix identifier and suffix Sut T where the identifier is a unique number date or date BeweenPrefiand Sufi Use sequential number and time depending on the option selected in the Be tween Prefix and Suffix menu een cancer kiih Start numbering at 1 Sample MikonQ001 Tokyo S x Sample Nikon0001
316. w unmodified image data from the camera s image sensor charge coupled display or CCD are saved in uncompressed form at a pixel bit depth of twelve bits per pixel RAW images can only be opened in Nikon Capture 4 and must be saved again in a standard image format such as TIFF or JPEG before they can be opened in another application See also NEF Resolution The density of dots or pixels that make up an image measured in dots per inch dpi or pixels per inch ppi the resolution of Macintosh monitors for example is 72 ppi The greater the density of dots or pixels the higher the resolution and the greater the capacity to express detail Resolution is hence the digital equivalent of film resolving power Computer monitors typically have a resolution of 72 ppi or 96 ppi while printers may have resolutions of 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200dpi or 2400 dpi See also ppcm ppi RGB An additive color model commonly used in monitors in which light emitted in three primary colors Red Green and Blue is combined to create a wide variety of colors White is modeled by mixing 100 of all three colors Scale The output size of an image as a percentage of the input size At a scale of 50 images will be output at half their original size Speedlight A brand name for Nikon flashes 277 Threshold The limit up to which Unsharp Mask will be applied While it is generally the case that the higher the threshold the greater the amount of sharpenin
317. w Nikon Browser Macintosh 1 Turn the computer on Double click the Nikon View 6 icon Open the folder to which you installed Nikon View 6 and double click the Nikon View 6 Nikon Browser Macintosh HD Users user Pictures img0001 Age St 7Oo E oF Ne Shooting Data Folders Nikon Scan 4 Man System Users Deleted Users 5 Desktop 5 Documents E Library m Movies E Music 2 Pictures Other Ways of Starting Nikon Browser Nikon Browser can be started by double clicking the Nikon View 6 icon Ww in the folder to which you in Stalled Nikon View 6 Windows Mac OS 9 If Nikon View 6 was added to the Dock during installation Mac OS X users will be able to start Nikon Browser by clicking the Nikon View 6 icon in the Dock 39 Exiting Nikon Capture 4 Browser To exit Nikon Browser open the File menu and select Exit Windows or Quit Mac OS 9 In Mac OS X select Quit Nikon View 6 from the application menu Close Ctrl hy Edit ctrl E Edit using other programs b Delete Del Delete Sound Page Setup Print Ctrl P Play Sound IPTC Information Ctrl J Tag marking b Attribute d At F4 Windows Nikon View 6 About Nikon View 6 Preferences K EW Close Edit E Services a Edit using other program gt e su Rename a file or a folder Hide Nikon View 6 aH Move Hide Others CH Copy Close Displayed Image Delete Len Quit Nikon View 6 Q
318. will be displayed Download Options Folder for images downloaded From the camera C Documents and Settings User My Documents My Pictures Next File name to be used Imgd001 When a new image is received From the camera Do nothing C Attach IPTC Information IPTC Information Cc Copy Shooting Data to IPTC Caption Adjust capture options Folder for images downloaded from the camera Use this area to select the folder to which photographs will be downloaded as they are taken Next file name to be used This area is used to specify how photographs captured from ES the camera will be named as they are saved to disk To re m choose how files are named click Edit The dialog shown oann e at right will be displayed Using the sample file name as anena E your guide enter a prefix and suffix and choose the starting ee EE b sant number and number of digits for automatic sequential file numbering Sample Img0001 Y File Naming Conventions Windows n environments that do not support long file names the maximum length is eight char acters file names may not contain spaces quotes or any of the following characters Z i e Uk my di iiam and e Where long file names are supported the maximum length is 255 characters file names may not con tain quotes or any of the following characters AW 7 i7 e y x 9 lt gt and I I Macintosh The maxi
319. will instantly revert to the saved settings Select this item to save current settings for the Vignette Control palette to a named file These settings can later be recalled using the Load option Choosing Save displays a dialog where you can choose a destination and file name for the current Vignette Control settings Vignette Control settings are W saved with the extension nvc Restores default settings Intensity will be set to 80 Recent Vignette Control settings files up to four are listed at the end of the settings menu Selecting a file from the list sets the controls in Vignette Control palette to the saved settings The Settings Menu The Vignette Control menu can also be displayed by selecting Vignette Con trol from the Settings menu ee lene White Balance gt Advanced RAW gt Copy to Clipboard Noise Reduction Load Curves Save Color Balance gt Reset to Default Unsharp Mask Size Resolution gt 167 Curves Although your Nikon digital camera will reproduce colors accurately if settings have been adjusted appropriately it will usually be necessary to adjust contrast tone brightness levels and color balance to make maximum use of the tone range and color gamut offered by a particular output device such as a printer or monitor Nikon Capture offers two tools for performing these tasks the Color Balance palette see Color Balance later in this chapter and the Curves palett
320. will not be shown in Windows Explorer ma om na resev creator e e ae preview ealed I Non NE ii w mage file with associated voice memo New Folder Ctrl N View Edit Ctrl E Edit using other programs gt Rename a file or a folder F2 Move Copy Delete Del Delete Sound Page Setup Print Ctrl P Play Sound IPTC Information Ctrl J Tag marking b Protection ON Ctrl L Protection OFF Ctrl Shift L Exit Alt F4 Hide mode ON Ctrl H Hide fi ode OFF Ctrl Shift H 52 Playing Voice Memos To play a voice memo select an image marked with the voice memo icon and select Play Sound from the File menu Under Windows the voice memo will be played back in the application specified in the Sound tab AE 111 of the Preferences dialog Play back sound DSC 0001_wav 00 00 00 00 00 01 4 1 Windows Play ss DSC_0003 WAV button F 00 00 02 00 00 02 Close Macintosh On a Macintosh click the play button to start playback Tagging Images To tag the images selected in the thumbnail list click the Add Tag Mark button in the toolbar or select Add Tag Mark in the File gt Tag marking menu The selected thumbnails will be marked with a tagged image attribute icon Tags can be removed by clicking the Remove Tag Mark button or selecting Remove Tag Mark in the File gt Tag marking menu Sa Add Tag mark button Remove Tag mark button Tagged Images N
321. with this name instead of the actual program name Executable file Displays the path and file name of the program that will be added To add a different program to the program list click Browse and select the program you want to add Click OK to add the selected program to the program list The Change Program Dialog Change program Hame Nikon Capture Editor Executable file C Program Files Mikon h Captured N Capture exe In the Change Program dialog you can change the name of the program that appears in the Edit tool button pull down menu and in the Edit using other programs sub menu This does not affect the name of the original program Printing Images To print one or more still pictures select the thumbnails in the thumbnail list and click the button in the toolbar or select Print trom the File menu The Print Layout dialog will be displayed Print layout Printer Epson Stylus Photo 2000P ESC P Paper Letter 8 1 2x11 inch P Printable area 8 27X10 31 inch V Print preview 1 Page gt Copies Page Setup Meta Data C Use output resolution Page layout Select layout 1 Up v Select picture size C Rotate image s to fit Print a picture multiple times Times C Borderless print o Use thumbnail data Draft use only Printer type Inkjet printer v Normal Print v After adjusting settings see below click Print to start printing
322. yed Large Preview Generator for NEF file For fast display of NEF images this operation generates two larger preview images which replace the smaller thumbnails within the original NEF files you have selected Please note that your camera will not be able to display these images after processing This operation can only be applied to NEF format files Process read only files IV Create previews using the sharpening setting from each file V Notify when completed V Show this dialog every time Cancel Adjust settings The following options are available Process read only files Windows Process locked files Macintosh Select this option to embed large previews in read only locked files Files on write pro tected or read only media such as CD ROMS are not affected Create previews using the sharpening setting from each file Select this option to process large previews to reflect the sharpening setting in effect in the source file Notify when completed If this option is selected a message will be displayed when processing is complete Show this dialog every time Select this option to display the dialog shown in Step 1 the next time the Nikon NEF Pre view Creator starts If this option is not selected this dialog will not be displayed the next time the Nikon NEF Preview Creator starts Instead the selected images will be processed at the settings in effect the last time the dialog was displayed The Nikon NEF Previ
323. you open one of the images to be pro cessed in Nikon Capture 4 and edit image adjustment settings to produce the desired result You can then save these settings in a joint settings file using the Save option in the Set tings gt Image Adjustment menu 195 By selecting the resulting settings file in the Batch dialog you can perform the same adjustments on all the images processed In studio settings where a variety of shooting conditions can be replicated with ease you can create separate settings files for commonly encountered conditions and use these settings to auto mate repetitive image enhancement operations Click the Ej button or select Batch from the Open the Batch dialog Tools menu 202 Vv Choose folder containing images for batch processing 202 Choose how images will be processed 203 Choose a file naming method and file format for processed images 204 Click Start to begin processing Open the Batch progress dialog 205 Click Batch Complete when processing is complete 205 Close the Batch progress dialog Before Using Batch Processing Batch processing is used to perform the operations specified in the Image Adjustments section of the Batch dialog on all files in a selected folder To ensure that desired results are achieved we recommend processing a test image before beginning batch processing Batch processing can not be used to adjust settings separately for each image instead the images must be

En User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents